corvetteactioncenter.com...Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Safety Belts .............................................. 1-9Child Restraints ....................................... 1-25Airbag System ......................................... 1-44Restraint System Check ............................ 1-59

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10Windows ................................................. 2-16Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-21Mirrors .................................................... 2-39OnStar® System ...................................... 2-45Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-48Storage Areas ......................................... 2-55Roof Panel .............................................. 2-58Convertible Top ....................................... 2-63

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-25Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-32Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-49Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-81

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-29

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12Rear Axle ............................................... 5-51Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-51Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-52Windshield Replacement ........................... 5-55Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-55Tires ...................................................... 5-58Appearance Care ..................................... 5-85Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-95Electrical System ...................................... 5-95Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-103

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-18

Index ................................................................ 1

2008 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the namesCORVETTE and Z06 and the CORVETTE Emblem areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may be available inthis model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.For example, more than one entertainment system maybe offered or your vehicle may have been orderedwithout a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15865985 A First Printing ©2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Using this ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle to learnabout the vehicle’s features and controls. Picturesand words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Abox with the word CAUTION is used to tell about thingsthat could hurt you or others if you were to ignore thewarning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to helpavoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means “DoNot,” “Do Not do this”or “Do Not let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsYou will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

iv

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-3Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters ......................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-4Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .........1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8

Safety Belts .....................................................1-9Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-25

Child Restraints .............................................1-25Older Children ..............................................1-25Infants and Young Children ............................1-29Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) (Z06 Models Only) ........................1-35

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) ............................................1-39

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position ............................................1-40

Airbag System ...............................................1-44Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-47When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-49What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-50How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-50What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-51Passenger Sensing System ............................1-52Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-57Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-58Restraint System Check ..................................1-59

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-59Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-60

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you do not want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward or rearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to thedesired position andrelease the bar.

Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seatis locked in place.

1-2

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat:

• Move the control forward or rearward to adjust theseat forward or rearward.

• Move the front or rear of the control up or down toadjust the height of the seat cushion.

Your seat position can be stored and recalled if youhave the memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering Wheel on page 1-4.

Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters

On vehicles with power lumbar and side bolsters:

(A) Move forward or rearward to adjust lumbar support.

(B) Move up or down to adjust the side bolsters.

1-3

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated seats, the buttons are locatedon the center console.

The ignition must be on for this feature to work.

L: Press to turn the seat on at the high setting, andtwice to turn it to the low setting.

9: Press to turn the system off.

Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheelOn vehicles with the memory package, the controls arelocated on the driver’s door.

1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.

2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.

B: Recalls the easy exit position.

The numbers on the back of the keyless accesstransmitters correspond to the numbers on the memorybuttons.

To save seating positions in the memory:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, both outside mirrors, andthe telescopic steering column to a comfortabledriving position.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let youknow that the position has been stored in thememory.

A second seating, mirror, and telescopic steeringcolumn position can be set by repeating the above stepsand pressing button 2.

To recall a memory position:

• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, pressand release the desired button.If the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single beep soundsand the memory position is recalled after a briefdelay.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps soundand the memory position is not recalled.

1-4

• On vehicles with a manual transmission, when thevehicle is on, the parking brake needs to be set torecall the memory position. Press and releasethe desired button.A single beep sounds and the memory position isrecalled after a brief delay.If the vehicle is on and the parking brake is not set,three beeps sound and the memory position isnot recalled.

For vehicles with the Auto Memory Recall, see “AutoMemory Recall” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 3-72 for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature at anytime, press one of the power seat controls, powermirror or memory buttons, or the telescopic steeringcolumn switch.

Easy Exit Seat

B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to programand recall the desired driver’s seat exit position.

To program an exit position:

1. Recall the desired driving position by pressingbutton 1.

2. Adjust the seat and the telescopic steering columnposition to a comfortable exit position.

3. Press and hold the exit button until two beepssound to let you know that the exit position isnow programmed.

A second exit position can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2.

To recall an exit position:

• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, thevehicle needs to be in PARK (P).

• On vehicles with a manual transmission, theparking brake needs to be set.

B: Press to recall an exit position.

One beep will sound and the exit position for thecurrently identified driver will be recalled.

For vehicles with the Auto Exit Recall, see “Auto ExitRecall” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-72for more information.

1-5

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you do not want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The leverused to operate them is located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift yourweight off the seatback. Pull completely up on thelever until it stops, and lean back to position theseatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lockthe seatback into place.

1-6

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

1-7

Seatback Latches

Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to therear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch,which is located on top of the backside of the seat, andpull the seatback forward. The seatback will lockdown in this position.

To unlock, lift up on the latch and push the seatbackrearward. When you return the seatback to its originalposition, make sure the seatback is locked in place.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

1-8

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannotwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle harder or be ejectedfrom it and be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle yoursafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-34.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

1-9

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as itgoes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-10

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-11

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-12

Questions and Answers About SafetyBelts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-13

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bonesand you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force onyour abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-14

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit snugly againstyour body.

1-15


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.

1-16


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not on the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-17


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goesover an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch too high. In a crash, you can slide underthe belt. The belt force would then be appliedon the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, andthat could cause serious or fatal injuries. Besure the belt goes under the armrests.

1-18


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

1-19


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, youwould not be restrained by the shoulder belt.Your body could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head and neck injury.You might also slide under the lap belt. Thebelt force would then be applied right on theabdomen. That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

1-20


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

1-21

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in your vehicle have alap-shoulder belt.

Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in theIndex.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passengerbelt out all the way, you may engage the childrestraint locking feature. If this happens, just let thebelt go back all the way and start again.Engaging the child restraint locking feature mayaffect the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 1-52.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-25.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if necessary.

1-22

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

1-23

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for frontoutboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can helptighten the safety belts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioner activation aremet. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safetybelt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts ina side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-60.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-24

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-25

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat, state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulderbelt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, thenreturn to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for thelength of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below thehips, just touching the top of the thighs. This appliesbelt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatal internal injuries ina crash.

According to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in rear seating positionsthan in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-26

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt cannot properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

1-27

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. In a crash, the child wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild might slide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied right on theabdomen. That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The child could also move too farforward increasing the chance of head andneck injury. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-28

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled ifa shoulder belt is wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues to tighten. Neverleave children unattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Children who are not restrained properlycan strike other people, or can be thrown out ofthe vehicle. In addition, young children should not usethe vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use achild restraint.

1-29

{CAUTION:

People should never hold an infant in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. An infant doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash an infant will become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it. For example, in a crash atonly 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infantwill suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

1-31

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsshould always be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-32

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in acrash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s body with theharness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Abooster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-33

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in acrash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions that camewith that restraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the

lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Z06 Models Only) on page 1-35 or LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe andConvertible Models Only) on page 1-39 for moreinformation. A child can be endangered in a crash if thechild restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, andto this manual. The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

1-34

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in acrash if the child is not properly secured in thechild restraint. Because there are differentsystems, it is important to refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint. Makesure the child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with that restraint.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Z06 Models Only)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As partof the LATCH system, your child restraint may havelower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCHsystem can help hold the child restraint in place during

driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/ortop tether anchors designed to secure a child restraintwith lower attachments and/or a top tether.

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors toaccommodate lower attachments. Your vehicle doeshave a top tether anchor. If your child restraint has a toptether, make sure your child restraint is properlyinstalled using the top tether anchor and the vehicle’ssafety belt. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor. Refer to your childrestraint instructions and see Securing a ChildRestraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-40for instructions on securing your child restraint usingthe vehicle’s safety belts.

In order to use the top tether anchors in your vehicle,you need a child restraint equipped with a top tether.The child restraint manufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use the child restraint and itstop tether. The following explains how to attach achild restraint with the top tether in your vehicle.

1-35

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraintto the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the childrestraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehiclein order to reduce the forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designedfor use with or without the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Askthe child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

1-36

Top Tether Anchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions with toptether anchors.

To assist you in locating thetop tether anchors, the toptether anchor symbol islocated on the trim cover.

The top tether anchor is located behind thepassenger seat.

1-37

Securing a Child Restraint with a TopTether

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto anchors, the restraint will not be able toprotect the child correctly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured or killed. Make surethat a LATCH-type child restraint is properlyinstalled using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in thismanual.

1. Secure the child restraint using the vehicle’s safetybelt. See Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position on page 1-40.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.Refer to the child restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover to

open the cover and expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint andyou are using a singletether, route the tether overthe headrest or headrestraint.

1-38

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe headrest or headrestraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Coupe andConvertible Models Only)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part ofthe LATCH system, your child restraint may havelower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCHsystem can help hold the child restraint in place duringdriving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lowerand/or top tether anchors designed to secure a childrestraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a top tether are designed tobe used whether the top tether is anchored or not.Other child restraints require that the top tetherbe anchored. A national or local law may require thatthe top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tetheranchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCHsystem. If a national or local law requires that your toptether be anchored, do not use a child restraint inthis vehicle because a top tether cannot be properlyanchored. You must use the safety belts to secure yourchild restraint in this vehicle, unless a national orlocal law requires that the top tether be anchored. Referto your child restraint instructions and instructions inthis manual for securing a child restraint using thevehicle’s safety belts. See Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 1-40.

1-39

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. In addition, your vehicle has apassenger sensing system which is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) undercertain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-52 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-36 for more information on this, includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-52for additional information.

1-40

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Z06Models Only) on page 1-35 or Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) on page 1-39 for how to install yourchild restraint using LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)(Z06 Models Only) on page 1-35 or Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) on page 1-39 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), theoff indicator on the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when you start thevehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-36.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-41

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-42

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor. Refer tothe instructions that came with the child restraintand to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Z06 Models Only) on page 1-35 or LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)(Coupe and Convertible Models Only) on page 1-39.

8. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator will come on and stayon when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the childrestraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightlyrecline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seatcushion if possible.

1-43

Remove any additional material from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters orseat massagers before reinstalling or securing the childrestraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraintin this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

Your vehicle may have the following airbags:

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right frontpassenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the wordAIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closestto the door.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

1-44

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are “supplementalrestraints” to the safety belts. All airbags aredesigned to work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

1-45

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when it inflates canbe seriously injured or killed. Do not situnnecessarily close to the airbag, as youwould be if you were sitting on the edge ofyour seat or leaning forward. Safety belts helpkeep you in position before and during acrash. Always wear your safety belt, even withairbags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door or side windows in seating positionswith seat-mounted airbags.

{CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children and infantsneed the protection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 1-25 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-29.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35for more information.

1-46

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panelon the passenger’s side.

1-47

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags forthe driver and right front passenger, they are in theside of the seatbacks closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Donot put anything between an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or put anything onthe steering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mounted side impactairbag.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-48

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s orright front passenger’s head and chest. However, theyare only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict how severe a crash islikely to be in time for the airbags to inflate andhelp restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Your vehicle may have one or two seat positionsensors, depending on what model you have. The seatposition sensor(s) enable the sensing system tomonitor the position of the driver’s seat (all modelsexcept Z06) and the right front passenger’s seat(all models). Seat position sensor(s) provide informationthat is used to determine if the airbags should deployat a reduced level or at full deployment.

Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted sideimpact airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-44.Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflatein moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side

1-49

impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed threshold level. The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For seat-mounted side impact airbags,deployment is determined by the location and severityof the side impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas fromthe inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causingthe bag to break out of the cover and deploy. Theinflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbagmodules in the side of the front seatbacks closestto the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mountedside impact airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags. See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 1-49 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

1-50

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize the airbags inflated. Somecomponents of the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of the airbag modules, seeWhat Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust inthe air. This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a history of asthmaor other breathing trouble. To avoid this,everyone in the vehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seek medicalattention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn onthe hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, andturn the hazard warning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.

1-51

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy onpage 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that theairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system for theright front passenger’s position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible in the rearviewmirror when you start your vehicle.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,will be visible during the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, willbe visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-36.

United States

Canada

1-52

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.The driver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger’s seat. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determine if the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than the front seat. Werecommend that rear-facing child restraints not betransported in your vehicle, even if the airbags are off.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) if the system detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be secured in arear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-53

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant is present ina rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off ofthe seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator willlight and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-36.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicatoris lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraintfrom the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following

the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer toSecuring a Child Restraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-40.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the childrestraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightlyrecline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seatcushion if possible.

Remove any additional material from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers before reinstalling or securing the childrestraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraintin this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) anytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing systemhas allowed the airbags to be enabled, the onindicator will light and stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

1-54

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for thatperson.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat.If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove anyadditional material from the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagersand ask the person to place the seatback in the fullyupright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered onthe seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for two to three minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, whichhelps the passenger sensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additional informationabout the importance of proper restraint use.

1-55

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out allthe way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. This may unintentionally cause the passengersensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for someadult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrumentpanel cluster ever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have the protectionof the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-35 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affecthow well the passenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment other than any that GM hasapproved for your specific vehicle. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-58 for more information about modifications thatcan affect how the system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seator between the passenger’s seat cushion andseatback may interfere with the properoperation of the passenger sensing system.

1-56

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-16.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

1-57

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any parts ofthe front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,the inside review mirror, front sensors, or airbagwiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger’s position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the passenger’sseat. The passenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either prevent proper deployment

of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-52.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Your dealer/retailer and the service manual haveinformation about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-58

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn orfrayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. SeeSafety Belt Reminders on page 3-34 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-88.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-35 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbag coverings. If there areany opened or broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-59

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the belt assemblies that were used during any crashmay have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have your safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was beingused during a crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thebelt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being usedat the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if yourvehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readinesslight stays on after you start your vehicle, or while youare driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-35.

1-60

Keys ...............................................................2-3Keyless Access System ...................................2-4Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-5

Doors and Locks ............................................2-10Door Locks ..................................................2-10Power Door Locks ........................................2-12Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-13Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-13Lockout Protection ........................................2-13Hatch ..........................................................2-14

Windows ........................................................2-16Power Windows ............................................2-17Sun Visors ...................................................2-18

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-18Immobilizer ..................................................2-20Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-20

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21Front Air Dam ..............................................2-22Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-23Starting the Engine .......................................2-23Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25

Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-31Parking Brake ..............................................2-34Shifting Into PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-35Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-36Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .....2-37Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-37Engine Exhaust ............................................2-37Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-38

Mirrors ...........................................................2-39Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-39Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

Compass .................................................2-41Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-43Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-44Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-44

OnStar® System .............................................2-45Universal Home Remote System ......................2-48

Universal Home Remote System .....................2-48Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With Three Round LED) ............................2-48

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Storage Areas ................................................2-55Glove Box ...................................................2-55Cupholder(s) ................................................2-55Center Console Storage .................................2-55Floor Mats ...................................................2-55Rear Storage Area ........................................2-56Convenience Net ..........................................2-57Cargo Cover ................................................2-57

Roof Panel .....................................................2-58Removing the Roof Panel ..............................2-59Storing the Roof Panel ..................................2-61Installing the Roof Panel ................................2-62

Convertible Top ..............................................2-63Convertible Top (Manual) ...............................2-63Convertible Top (Power) ................................2-70

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keylessaccess transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operate thepower windows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The windows will functionwith the keyless access transmitter in thevehicle and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keyless accesstransmitter in a vehicle with children.

2-3

The key, located inside thekeyless access transmitter,can be used for theglove box and can openthe hatch/trunk lid if vehiclepower is lost. See Hatchon page 2-14 for moreinformation.

To remove the key, pressthe button (A) near thebottom of the keylessaccess transmitter, andpull the key out. Never pullthe key out withoutpressing the button.

Your vehicle has a keyless access system withpushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-22for information on starting the vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/orkey, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle. Youmay even have to damage your vehicle to get in.Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.

If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-8.

Keyless Access SystemYour vehicle has a Keyless Access System thatoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules and withIndustry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

2-4

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless accesstransmitter range, try doing one of the following:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underKeyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.

• Check to make sure that an electronic device suchas a cellular phone or lap top computer is notcausing interference.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retaileror a qualified technician for service.

Keyless Access System OperationYour vehicle has a keyless access system that allows youto lock and unlock your doors, unlock your hatch/trunk lidand disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The rangedistance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.

Your vehicle comes standard with two transmitters, andup to four can be matched to your vehicle. See “MatchingTransmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in this section.

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors. The lighton the door will flash once. If this button is pressedtwo times, the doors will lock, the light will flash and thehorn will sound.

2-5

K (Unlock): Press this button to unlock the driver’sdoor. The light on the door will flash two times. Press thebutton two times within 10 seconds to unlock bothdoors. If it is dark enough outside, your interior lampswill come on.

Your memory settings may also be recalled when youpress the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 1-4 for more information.

} (Hatch/Trunk): Press and hold this button forabout one second to open the hatch/trunk lid while theengine is turned off. If the engine is running the shiftlever needs to be in PARK (P) for an automatictransmission or NEUTRAL with the parking brake set fora manual transmission. See Parking Brake onpage 2-34.

L (Panic): Press this button to sound the vehiclealarm. Press any other button on the keyless accesstransmitter to stop the vehicle alarm.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach keyless access transmitter is coded to allowonly transmitters programmed to your vehicle, to work.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer.Your dealer/retailer can reprogram your vehicle so lostor stolen transmitters no longer work with your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when youhave a recognized transmitter (two recognizedtransmitters are required for Canadian owners):

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognizedtransmitters on your person.

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehiclekey into the key cylinder located above the licenseplate. See Hatch on page 2-14 for more informationon the key cylinder.

4. Open the trunk.

5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.

6. The DIC will display READY FOR FOB #X, whereX can be 2, 3 or 4.

2-6

7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket with the buttonsfacing towards the passenger’s side.

8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep willsound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X, whereX can be 3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBSLEARNED.

9. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).

The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadianowners to see their dealer/retailer for matching newtransmitters when two recognized transmitters are notavailable. United States owners are permitted to match anew transmitter to their vehicle when a recognizedtransmitter is not available. The procedure will requirethree ten minutes cycles to complete the matchingprocess.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket with the buttonsfacing towards the passenger side.

2-7

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehiclekey into the key cylinder located above the licenseplate. See Hatch on page 2-14 for more informationon the key cylinder.

4. Open the trunk.

5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.

6. The DIC message will display OFF-ACCESSORYTO LEARN.


8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.

9. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARNagain.



12. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARNagain.



15. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READYFOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously knowntransmitters have been erased.

16. Once the transmitter is recognized andprogrammed, a beep will sound and the DIC willdisplay READY FOR FOB #2.

If you have additional transmitters to program, taketransmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and placetransmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedlyuntil up to four transmitters have be programmed.The DIC will then display MAXIMUM NUMBER OFFOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode.

When you are done programming transmitters, pressthe Acc. button (ignition switch).

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your keyless accesstransmitter should last about three years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at thenormal range in any location. If you have to get closeto your vehicle before the transmitter works, it isprobably time to change the battery.

2-8

A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NOFOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.If this happens, place the transmitter in the glovebox transmitter pocket with the buttons facing towardsthe passenger’s side. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P)for an automatic transmission, press the brake pedaland the START button. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, press the clutch and the START button.Although this will start the vehicle, it is recommendedthat you replace the transmitter battery as soon aspossible. The DIC may display FOB BATTERY LOW.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the slot onthe side or back of the transmitter and separate thebottom half from the top half.

2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.

3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)side down. Use a battery, type CR2032, orequivalent.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put ittogether so water will not get in.

5. Test the transmitter.

2-9

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked itwill not open. You increase the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

CAUTION: (Continued)


• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, press the lock or unlock button onthe keyless access transmitter.

2-10

When you have the transmitter with you, you may alsounlock and open the door by squeezing the doorhandle sensor (A). You do not have to press the unlockbutton on the transmitter. You will be able to openthe door when you press the door handle sensor andthe vehicle recognizes your keyless access transmitter.When the passenger door is opened first, the driver’sdoor will also unlock.

From the inside, use the power door lock switch locatedat the top of the door panel near both windows. SeePower Door Locks on page 2-12.

To open a door from the inside, press the button (B) infront of the door handle and push the door open.You will hear a tone when the button is pressed.

If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitteris lost, there are two ways to open the door.

From inside the vehicle, use the door release handlelocated on the floor next to each seat. Pull the handle upto unlock and unlatch the door.

Door Open to Show Location of Door Handle Sensor

2-11

From outside the vehicle, use the key in the cylinderabove the license plate to open the hatch then use thedoor release tab located on the carpet inside the trunk onthe driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock andunlatch the driver’s door. See Keys on page 2-3 forinformation on opening the trunk during a loss of power.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on the doors.

There is an indicator light on the rear of the doornear the window.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.

When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closedwhen pressed, the light flashes twice. If the door is openwhen pressed, the light flashes.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed whenpressed, the light comes on for a few seconds, then turnsoff. If the door is open when pressed, the light stays on.

2-12

Automatic Door LockYour vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors areclosed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P) for automatic transmissions, or when vehiclespeed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h) for manualtransmissions, both doors will lock.

If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is runningor not in PARK (P), have the person use the powerdoor unlock switch. When the door is closed again, thedoors will lock either when your foot is removedfrom the brake or the vehicle speed becomes fasterthan 8 mph (13 km/h).

Programmable AutomaticDoor UnlockYour vehicle is programmed so that when the shift leveris moved into PARK (P) for automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition is turned off or is inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) for manualtransmission vehicles, both doors will unlock.

With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, doorunlocking can be programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Theseprompts allow the driver to choose various unlocksettings. For programming information, see DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-72.

Lockout ProtectionYour vehicle can be programmed to sound the hornthree times and unlock the driver’s door when bothdoors are closed and there is a keyless accesstransmitter inside the vehicle. When the driver’s door isopened, a reminder chime will sound continuously.The vehicle will remain locked only when at least onetransmitter has been removed from the vehicle and bothdoors are closed. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-72.

2-13

Hatch

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thehatch/trunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If you mustdrive with the hatch/trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between the bodyand the hatch/trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System on page 3-25.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.

Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefully orfrom the sides can cause damage to the glass, thedefogger or the weather stripping. Be sure objectswill fit in the hatch/trunk area before closing thehatch/trunk lid. When closing the hatch/trunklid, gently pull down from the center.

Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in therear storage compartments located in thehatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects coulddamage the underbody.

2-14

Hatch/Trunk Lid ReleaseThere are several ways to release the hatch/trunk lid. Ifyour vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in PARK (P). For manual transmissionvehicles, the parking brake must be set when the ignitionis started for the hatch/trunk release to operate. Theparking brake does not need to be set when the ignitionis off for the hatch/trunk release to operate. SeeParking Brake on page 2-34.

• V (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lidrelease button, located on the instrument panelto the left of the steering wheel. The theft-deterrentalarm system must not be armed.

• } (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lidrelease button on the keyless access transmitter.See Keyless Access System on page 2-4.

• Press the hatch/trunk release button located on therear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate,as long as you have your transmitter with you.

If your vehicle has lost battery power, open thehatch/trunk using the vehicle key. See Keys on page 2-3for more information. The key lock cylinder is locatedon the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate.Turn the vehicle key clockwise in the lock.

Closing the Rear Compartment (Coupe)To assist in closing the rear compartment lid ofyour coupe, use the pocket on the underside of the lidon the passenger’s side of the vehicle. When closing thelid, lower it until the power pull down latch featureactivates and it will close the rest of the way and latchautomatically.

2-15

Emergency Trunk Release Handle(Convertible Only)

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located on the rear wall of the trunk belowthe latch. This handle will glow following exposure tolight. Pull the release handle down to open thetrunk from the inside.

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-16

Power Windows

The power windowswitches are located oneach door.

Pull up or press down on the front of the switch to raiseor lower the window.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) allows you to use thepower windows when the ignition is off. For moreinformation, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-23.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on both power windows. Press the frontof the switch to the second position to activate theexpress-down feature. If you want to stop the windowas it is lowering, press the switch again.

2-17

Window IndexingThis feature automatically lowers the window a smallamount when the door is opened. When the dooris closed, the window will raise to its full up position. Ifeither window does not index properly, it could be due toloss of power. Before returning to your dealer/retailerfor service, perform the power window initializeprocedure.

Power Window InitializeAfter a power reconnect such as battery replacement,the window index-up feature will not function untilthe system is initialized.

Once power is restored:

1. Close the door.

2. Raise the window and hold the switch up for threeseconds after the window is closed.

3. Release the switch, then hold the switch up againfor three seconds and release.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also swing them to the side.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsPull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose thelighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lampswill come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

With this system, thesecurity light will flashwhen the door is open andlocked with the powerdoor lock switch.

If this light is on continuously while the engine isrunning, your vehicle needs service.

2-18

Arming the SystemTo arm the system:

• Press the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.

• Open the door. Lock the door with the power doorlock switch. The security light should flash.Remove the keyless access transmitter from insidethe vehicle and close the door. The security lightwill stop flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, thelight should turn off.The vehicle can be programmed to automaticallylock the doors and arm the theft-deterrent systemwhen you exit the vehicle. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-72.

Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk is opened without thekeyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off.Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go offto save battery power. Your vehicle will not startwithout a keyless access transmitter present.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock thedriver’s door with the power door lock switch afterthe doors are closed.

If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leavewith the keyless access transmitter, have the passengerlock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way thealarm will not arm, and your passenger will not set it off.

Testing the AlarmTo test the system:

1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is latched.

2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.

3. Manually arm the system.

4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.

5. Reach through the open window and manually pullthe release lever on the floor.

6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button onthe transmitter.

If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the hornworks. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-96. If the horn works, but thealarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer/retailer.

Disarming the SystemAlways use your keyless access transmitter to unlock adoor either by pressing the unlock button on thetransmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensorwhile you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking adoor any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarmsounds, press the unlock button on the keylessaccess transmitter to disarm it.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-19

ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:







Immobilizer OperationYour vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the ignitionmode transitions to off.

The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignitionmode transitions to OFF/ACCESSORY or START anda valid transmitter is found in the vehicle.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more keyless accesstransmitters that are matched to an immobilizer controlunit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keylessaccess transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keylessaccess transmitter is ever damaged, you may notbe able to start your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does notstart and the security light comes on, there may bea problem with your immobilizer system. Pressthe START button again.

2-20

If the vehicle does not start and the keyless accesstransmitter appears to be undamaged, try anotherkeyless access transmitter. Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBSDETECTED” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for additional information. At this time, youmay also want to check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-96. If the engine still doesnot start with the other transmitter, your vehicleneeds service. If the engine does start, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. See your dealer/retailerwho can service the theft-deterrent system and havea new keyless access transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new orreplacement keyless access transmitters. Up to 4keyless access transmitters can be programmed for thevehicle. To program additional transmitters, see“Matching transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under KeylessAccess System Operation on page 2-5.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast orslow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

2-21

Front Air DamYour vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which hasminimal ground clearance.

Under normal operation, the air dam will occasionallycontact some road surfaces (speed bumps, drivewayramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as ascraping noise. This is normal and does not indicatea problem.

Use care when approaching bumps or objects on roadsurfaces and avoid them when possible.

Ignition Positions

Your vehicle has anelectronic keyless ignitionwith a pushbutton start.

In order to shift out of PARK (P), the vehicle must berunning or in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on thebrake for an automatic transmission, or while pressingin the clutch for a manual transmission, to start theengine. If your vehicle is in OFF or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) mode, the keyless access transmittermust be inside the vehicle to start the engine.

2-22

9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine is onor the vehicle is in accessory power mode, it isrecommended that a manual transmission be placed inREVERSE (R). An automatic transmission must beplaced in PARK (P). Then press the Acc. button to turnthe engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” later for moreinformation. If an automatic vehicle is not correctlyplaced in PARK (P) a SHIFT TO PARK message willdisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

For more information, see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55.

When the engine is off, press this button to place thevehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODEON will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).This mode allows you to use things like the radioand the windshield wipers while the engine is off. Useaccessory mode if you must have your vehicle in motionwhile the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle isbeing pushed or towed.

After being in accessory mode for about 10 minutes, thevehicle will automatically enter RAP or OFF, dependingon if the doors are opened or closed.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

These features continue to work up to 10 minutes afterthe engine is turned off or until either door is opened.If a door is opened, the power windows and audiosystem will shut off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) foran automatic transmission. For a manual transmissionthe vehicle can be started in NEUTRAL or any othergear as long as the clutch is depressed. To restarta manual transmission when you are already moving,use the NEUTRAL position only. To restart an automatictransmission when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N).

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

The keyless access transmitter must be inside thevehicle for the ignition to work.

2-23

Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation ofthe Keyless Access System. Battery chargers shouldnot be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.

To start your vehicle, do the following:

1. For an automatic transmission, with your foot on thebrake pedal, press the START button located on theinstrument panel. For a manual transmission, whilepressing in the clutch, press the START button.If there is not a keyless access transmitter in thevehicle or if there is something causing interferencewith it, the DIC will display NO FOBS DETECTED.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55for more information.

2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of thebutton and the engine cranks automatically untilit starts. If the battery in the keyless accesstransmitter is weak, the DIC displays FOBBATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless AccessSystem Operation on page 2-5 for more information.If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert thefob into the fob slot to enable engine starting. See“No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55.

3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message isdisplayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to letthe cranking motor cool down.If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floorwhile cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum. Waitat least 15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts brieflybut then stops again, do the same thing. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by pressing the START button immediatelyafter cranking has ended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait atleast 15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.

2-24

Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting the engine andprotects components. Once cranking has beeninitiated, the engine continues cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start, cranking automatically stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system also prevents cranking if theengine is already running.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If electrical parts oraccessories are added, you could change the waythe engine operates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you donot, the engine might not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not be covered byyour vehicle’s warranty.

Stopping Your EngineIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, move theshift lever to PARK (P) and press and hold the Acc.(Off/Accessory) button, located on the instrument panel,until the engine shuts off. If the shift lever is not in PARK(P), the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes into theAccessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT TO PARK.

Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicleturns off. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,it is recommended that you move the shift lever toREVERSE (R) and set the parking brake after you turn offthe engine by pressing the Acc. (Off/Accessory) button.

If the keyless access transmitter is not detected insidethe vehicle when it is turned to off, the DIC displays NOFOB – OFF OR RUN?.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55 formore information.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater, if available, can help in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easierstarting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours beforestarting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation at temperaturesabove 0°F (−18°C).

2-25

To Use The Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The electrical cord is located on the driver’s sideof the engine compartment, in front of the coolantsurge tank.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer/retailer in the area where you will beparking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give youthe best advice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several differentpositions for your shiftlever.

2-26

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It isthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-35.

Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system.

You have to fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then pressthe shift lever button and move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P) onpage 2-36.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 4-23.

2-27

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. If your vehicleneeds towing, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It providethe best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you needmore power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditionscould result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss ofControl on page 4-13.

SPORT MODE (S): When in SPORT MODE (S), thetransmission will work as an automatic until you use theManual Paddle Shift Controls, which activates thedriver manual gear selection. See Manual Paddle Shiftlater in this section. While in automatic SPORTMODE (S), the transmission computer determines whenthe vehicle is being driven in a competitive mannerand will select and hold the transmission in lower gearsand have more noticeable upshifts for sportier vehicleperformance.

2-28

Manual Paddle ShiftWhile in the SPORT MODE (S) position, the paddleslocated on the steering wheel, can be used to manuallyup-shift or down-shift the transmission.

While in the SPORT MODE (S) mode, push the paddleabove the steering wheel spokes to up-shift to thenext gear, or pull on the paddle behind the steeringwheel spokes to down-shift to the next gear.

To use the system, shift from PARK (P) position toSPORT MODE (S) while stopped and with the enginerunning, or from DRIVE (D) with the vehicle moving.When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowyand icy conditions, you may want to shift to second (2)or third (3) gear. A higher gear allows you to gainmore traction on slippery surfaces. If the traction controlis active, upshifts are delayed to increase your controlof the vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-6.

While the Manual Paddle Shift gear selection system isactive, the transmission will automatically downshiftthrough the gears as the vehicle slows. Thetransmission will select second gear as the vehiclestops. From a stop, the vehicle will start from and holdsecond (2) gear unless the driver manually paddleshifts into a different gear or selects DRIVE (D). Thedriver can select first (1) gear for maximum accelerationfrom a stop.

2-29

When using the ManualPaddle Shift Feature whilein the SPORT MODE (S),the current gear will bedisplayed in the DriverInformation (DIC), or theHead-Up Display (HUD), ifthe vehicle has either ofthese features.

If your vehicle has a Navigation system, see “Head-UpDisplay (HUD)” in the Index of the navigation manual.

The Manual Paddle Shift system will not allow either anup-shift or a down-shift if the vehicle speed is toofast or too slow, nor will it allow a start from Fourth (4)or higher gear

If up-shifting does not occur when needed, the vehiclespeed will be limited to protect the engine.

The transmission will also automatically down-shift asthe vehicle slows down and comes to a stop.

When the transmission gear does not respond to a shiftchange, the DIC will show an X over the gear display.

When a requested shift isdenied due to the speedrestrictions shown, the DICwill momentarily showan X over the gear displayand a chime will sound.

If the vehicle has a HUD, and the transmission geardoes not respond to a shift change, then a chimewill sound and the HUD will momentarily show an Xover the gear display.

Manual Paddle Shift operation is available for use withCruise Control, see Cruise Control on page 3-11 formore information.

2-30

The vehicle speeds required for Manual Paddle Shiftup-shifts depend on several vehicle inputs, whichwill vary the allowed up-shift speed by a few mph (km/h).

• Up-shifts to Fourth (4) gear require approximately22 mph (35 km/h).

• Up-shifts to Fifth (5) gear require approximately28 mph (45 km/h).

• Up-shifts to Sixth (6) gear require approximately41 mph (65 km/h).

To prevent damage to the powertrain, Manual Paddledownshifts to a lower gear cannot be done above certainspeeds. The maximum speed allowed for downshiftingof gears one (1) through fourth (4) are:

• Into Fourth (4) gear over 168 mph (270 km/h)

• Into Third (3) gear over 124 mph (200 km/h)

• Into Second (2) gear over 81 mph (130 km/h)

• Into First (1) gear over 45 mph (72 km/h).

If the driver does not request an upshift as the enginespeed approaches fuel shut off RPM, the enginespeed will be limited to protect the engine. SeeTachometer on page 3-34 for more information.

Manual Transmission Operation

This is the shift pattern forthe six-speed manualtransmission.

Here is how to operate your transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going lessthan 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stopand it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

2-31

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up onthe accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6): Shiftinto THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6)the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press thebrake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press theclutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idleyour engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutchpedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressureto get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) intoREVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly whilepressing the accelerator pedal.

Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature thatallows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) whilethe vehicle is rolling at less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Youwill be locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, youcould lose control of your vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Do not shift downmore than one gear at a time when youdownshift.

2-32

This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gearfor the best fuel economy.

Manual Transmission RecommendedShift Speeds in mph (km/h)

EngineAcceleration Shift Speed

1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6AllEngines 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)

If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if theengine is not running smoothly, you should downshift tothe next lower gear. You may have to downshift twoor more gears to keep the engine running smoothly orfor good engine performance.

Notice: When shifting gears, do not move the shiftlever around unnecessarily. This may damagethe transmission. Shift directly into the next gear.

One to Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

When this light comes on,you can only shift fromFIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)instead of FIRST (1) toSECOND (2).

See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual Transmission) onpage 3-38 for more information.

2-33

Downshifting (Manual Transmission)Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speedgreater than shown in the table:

FIRST (1) 50 mph (80 km/h)SECOND (2) 74 mph (119 km/h)

THIRD (3) 101 mph (163 km/h)FOURTH (4) 130 mph (209 km/h)

Notice: If you skip more than one gear when youdownshift, or if you race the engine when yourelease the clutch pedal while downshifting, youcould damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or thetransmission. Do not skip gears or race theengine when downshifting.

The six-speed transmission has a spring that centersthe shift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4).This spring helps you know which gear you are in whenyou are shifting. Be careful when shifting fromFIRST (1) to SECOND (2) or downshifting fromSIXTH (6) to FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull theshift lever toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3).Make sure you move the lever into SECOND (2) orFIFTH (5). If you let the shift lever move in the directionof the pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1)to FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).

Parking BrakeThe parking brake lever is located to the right of thecenter console.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Then push the release button in as you move theparking brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

2-34

Shifting Into PARK (P) (AutomaticTransmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-34 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in thebutton on the lever and pushing the lever all theway toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) to turn theengine off.

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After youhave moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold downthe regular brake pedal. See if you can move theshift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

2-35

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the transmission parking pawl, so you canpull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lockrelease system. The shift lock release is designed to:

Prevent shifting out of PARK (P) unless the vehicleis running or in Accessory mode and the regular brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is always functional except in thecase of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a batterywith low voltage, try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting on page 5-46

To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shiftlever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice.

2-36

Parking Your Vehicle (ManualTransmission)Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift leverinto REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parkingbrake. Once the shift lever has been placed intoREVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you canturn the ignition off and release the clutch.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass, or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange or

different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into yourvehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-37

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-37.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-19.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-35.

2-38

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassThe vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror with OnStar®, a compass and map lamps.Three OnStar® buttons are at the bottom of the mirror.See OnStar® System on page 2-45 for moreinformation on the services OnStar® provides.

Mirror OperationThe mirror automatically changes to reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you. A time delay feature preventsrapid changing from the day to night positions whiledriving under lights and through traffic.

P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature isactivated when the vehicle is started. The automaticdimming feature is turned on or off by pressingthis button located on the lower part of the mirror. Pressand hold the button for up to three seconds to turnthis feature on or off.

T (Indicator Light): This light will turn on when theautomatic dimming feature is active.

Map LampsThe mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of themirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, pressthe button next to each lamp.

Compass OperationThe mirror has an eight-point compass display in thebottom of the mirror face.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, thecompass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds, themirror will display the current compass heading.For example, NE is displayed for north-east.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show acompass heading, there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic antenna mount, notepad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears inthe compass window, the compass needs calibration.

The mirror compass can be calibrated by drivingthe vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

The compass can be placed in calibration mode bypressing and holding the left map light button until a Cappears on the compass display.

2-39

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirroris not adjusted for compass variance, your compasscould give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance if you live outsidezone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a longdistance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary toadjust the compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and azone number appears on the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Once the zone number appears on the display,press the on/off button quickly until you reachthe correct zone number. Stop pressing the buttonand the mirror will return to normal operation.If C appears in the compass window, the compassmay need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”listed previously.

2-40

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassIf the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimmingmirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimizeglare at night from lights behind your vehicle.

The mirror also includes a compass display in the upperright corner of the mirror face.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned on eachtime the ignition is started. A light near the on/off buttonwill come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on.

Press the on/off button for about six seconds tomanually turn the automatic dimming function on or off.

Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly toturn the compass display on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to becalibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” later in this section.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:

1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximatelyfour seconds until either a flashing °F, or °Cappears.

2. Press the button again to change the display to thedesired unit of measurement. After approximatelyfour seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be lockedin and the compass/temperature display willreturn.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for anextended period of time, please consult yourdealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.

2-41

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’scompass could give false readings. The mirror isset in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will benecessary to adjust the compass to compensatefor compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.Under certain circumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will also be necessary to adjustfor compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and azone number appears in the display. The compassis now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desiredzone number appears in the display. Release thebutton. After approximately four seconds ofinactivity, the new zone number will be locked inand the compass/temperature display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described below.

2-42

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the display doesnot show a compass heading (N for North, forexample), there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correct headingand the compass zone variance is set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, pushthe on/off button for approximately 12 seconds oruntil CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the displayreads a direction.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Power Heated Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door.

Move the top selector control to the left or right to selecteither the driver’s or passenger’s mirror. To adjust thedirection of the mirror, use the arrows on the roundfour-way control. Adjust each outside mirror so that alittle of the vehicle and the area behind it can beseen while sitting in a comfortable, driving position.Keep the control in the center position when notadjusting either outside mirror.

2-43

If the vehicle has the memory feature, a preferred mirrorposition can be stored. See Memory Seat, Mirrorsand Steering Wheel on page 1-4.

Both mirrors are heated to rid them of snow, ice, orcondensation. They will heat when the rear windowdefogger is turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger”under Dual Automatic Climate Control System onpage 3-25.

Both mirrors can manually be folded inward by pullingthem toward the vehicle. This feature may be usefulwhen going through a car wash or a confined space.Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normalposition, before driving.

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorIf your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s sideoutside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlampsbehind you. This feature is controlled by the on and offsetting on the inside mirror.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’ssurface is curved so more can be seen from thedriver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,look farther away than they really are.

2-44

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,security, information, and convenience services. If yourairbags deploy, the system is designed to make anautomatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sent to your location.If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlockyour doors. If you need roadside assistance, pressthe OnStar button and they can contact RoadsideService for you.

OnStar service is provided to you subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel yourOnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar. Acomplete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStarTerms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827) or TTY1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar button to speakwith an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide theservices described below, or for a full description ofOnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStarOwner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,or the Directions & Connections Plan is included forone year from the date of purchase. You can extend thisplan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions& Connections Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar.

2-45

Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentaryminutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated intothe vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may alsobe linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with anOnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-FreeCalling that uses your minutes to access location-basedweather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Bypressing the phone button and giving a few simple voicecommands, you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information (onlyavailable in the continental U.S.).

2-46

How OnStar Service WorksYour vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar CallCenter at the time of an OnStar button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usually includesyour GPS location and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding the accident that yourvehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction fromwhich your vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, yourvehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that wecan provide you with location-based services.

OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStarservice also cannot work unless you are in a placewhere the wireless service provider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly in remote orenclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about your vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

Your vehicle must have a working electrical system(including adequate battery power) for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service to you at any particular time or place.Some examples are damage to important parts of yourvehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather or wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStaradvisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,this means that your system is not functioning properlyand should be checked by a dealer/retailer. If thelight appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired. You can always press theOnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipmentis active.

2-47

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides a way toreplace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)transmitters used to activate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificatenumber is KOBGTV06A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTV06A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, security systems,and home automation devices.

2-48

Do not use this system with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,it may be helpful to have another person available toassist you in programming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitterfor use in other vehicles, as well as, for futureprogramming. You only need the original remote controltransmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale or lease termination ofthe vehicle, the programmed buttons should beerased for security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised to parkoutside of the garage. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage door or security deviceyou are programming.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeIf you have questions or need help programming theUniversal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 orgo to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are RollingCode units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow these actions, thedevice will time out and you will have to repeat theprocedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outsidebuttons at the same time for one to two seconds,and immediately release them.

2-49

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where thehanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-headunit and may be a colored button. Press thisbutton. After you press this button, you will have30 seconds to complete the following steps.

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and holdthe Universal Home Remote button that you wouldlike to use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, above theselected button, should slowly blink. You mayneed to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, release the buttonwhen the garage door moves. The indicator lightwill blink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosinga different function button in Step 3 than what youused for the garage door opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probably have aFixed Code garage door opener. Follow theProgramming instructions that follow for a Fixed Codegarage door opener.

2-50

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeIf you have questions or need help programming theUniversal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 orgo to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are FixedCode units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow these actions, thedevice will time out and you will have to repeat theprocedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage dooropener, remove the battery cover on your handheld transmitter supplied by the manufacturerof your garage door opener motor. If you see a rowof dip switches similar to the graphic above, youhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. If youdo not see a row of dip switches, return tothe previous section for Programming UniversalHome Remote – Rolling Code.

2-51

Your hand held transmitter may have betweeneight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand oftransmitter.Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)may also have a row of dip switches that can beused when programming the Universal HomeRemote. If the total number of switches on the motorhead and hand held transmitter are different, or ifthe dip switch settings are different, use thedip switch settings on the motor head unit toprogram your Universal Home Remote. The motorhead dip switch settings can also be used whenyou do not have the original hand held transmitter.

Your panel of switches may not appear exactly asthey do in the examples above, but they shouldbe similar.The switch positions on your hand-held transmittermay be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeled as“Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may be labeled as“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may be labeledas “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

2-52

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from leftto right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote down in Step2 will now become the button strokes youenter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.Be sure to enter the switch settings that youwrote down in Step 2, in order from left to right,into the Universal Home Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press allthree buttons at the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release the buttons to put theUniversal Home Remote into programming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will have two andone-half minutes to complete Step 4. Nowpress one button on the Universal Home Remotefor each switch setting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in thevehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in thevehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button inthe vehicle.

2-53

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,firmly press and release all three buttons at thesame time. The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like to use tocontrol the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light above the selected buttonshould slowly blink. You may need to hold thebutton from five to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when the garagedoor moves. The indicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosinga different button in Step 6 than what you used forthe garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at least half ofa second. The indicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeatingthe instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons when yousell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the sametime for approximately 20 seconds, until theindicator lights, located directly above the buttons,begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release bothbuttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.

For help or information on the Universal Home RemoteSystem, call the customer assistance phone numberunder Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.

2-54

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use the keyto lock and unlock. The glove box has a light inside.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders located on the center consolenext to the shift lever. To access, place your thumb on theleft side of the lid and slide the handle to the right.

Center Console StorageTo use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’sside front edge of the console and swing it to thepassenger side.

Floor MatsThe floor mats are designed to remain in position underyour feet and out of reach of the accelerator pedal.The driver side floor mat is held in place by two locatorpins and the passenger side is held in place by one.

Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator pedal.

To remove a floor mat, pullup on the rear of the matto disconnect it fromthe locator pins.

To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in thefloor mat over the locator pins and push it downinto place.

2-55

Rear Storage AreaThere are two rear storage compartments in the floor ofthe rear hatch/trunk area.

Your vehicle has two storage compartment lids.

To access a storage compartment, pull up to open thelid. The lids cannot be removed.

For Z06 models the right rear compartment stores thebattery and cannot be used for storage.

Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in therear storage compartments located in thehatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects coulddamage the underbody.

Rear Trunk PartitionFor vehicles with the power convertible top option only,there is a trunk partition to keep cargo from gettingin the way of the convertible top. The trunk partition mustbe in place for the top to move. If the trunk partition isnot properly in place the ATTACH TRUNK PARTITIONDriver Information Center (DIC) message will displayand you will not be able to remove the convertible top.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55 formore information.

The trunk partition is a flat carpeted board with ahorizontal flap that can be attached to the top of thetrunk to divide the storage compartment or storedflat when not in use.

Convertible shown, Coupe similar

2-56

Pull the divider up and snap it onto the snaps on bothsides of the trunk.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear ofthe vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net is notfor heavier loads. Store them as far forward as you can.

Cargo CoverIf your vehicle has this feature, the security shade canprovide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle.The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from theremovable roof when it is stored in the rear compartment.

Using the Cargo Cover

1. Hook the elastic loopson the front corners (A)of the shade to theT-nuts located on thefront corners of the rearhatch frame.

2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of theshade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatchframe, near the rear corners.

2-57

3. Grasp the loop at the rear center of the shade andwrap it around the striker assembly.

4. Push the loop to thetop of the striker(base plate).

Roof PanelThe vehicle may have a removable roof panel. Followthe procedures listed when removing or installing it.

2-58

Removing the Roof Panel

{CAUTION:

Do not try to remove a roof panel while thevehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roofpanel while the vehicle is moving could causean accident. The panel could fall into thevehicle and cause you to lose control, or itcould fly off and strike another vehicle. You orothers could be injured. Remove the roof panelonly when the vehicle is parked.

Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,have someone help you.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its edges,the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping may bedamaged. Always place the roof panel in the stowagereceivers after removing it from the vehicle.

1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shifta manual transmission into NEUTRAL.

2. Make sure the ignition is off.

3. Lower both sun visors.

4. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that mayinterfere with proper storage of the roof panel.

5. Lower the windows.There are two release latches on the front of theroof panel and one rear release latch on the back ofthe roof panel.

6. To unlock the release latches on the front of theroof panel, grasp each handle with your fingersand pull it outward.

2-59

The driver’s side handle moves toward the driver’sdoor. The passenger’s side handle moves towardthe passenger’s door.

7. To unlock the rear ofthe roof panel’s rearrelease latch, press theback of the releasehandle (B). Then pressthe button on thefront of the releasehandle, (A) withyour thumb.

Pull down the latch lever with your fingers.

8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and if necessary,have someone stand on the other side. Together,carefully lift the front edge of the roof panel upand forward.

9. When the roof panel is loosened from the vehicle,one person should grasp the roof panel as close tothe center as possible and lift it away from thevehicle.

2-60

Storing the Roof Panel

{CAUTION:

If a roof panel is not stored properly, it couldbe thrown about the vehicle in a crash orsudden maneuver. People in the vehicle couldbe injured. Whenever you store a roof panel inthe vehicle, always be sure that it is storedsecurely in the proper location.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstrippingmay be damaged. Always place the roof panel inthe stowage receivers after removing it fromthe vehicle.

1. Turn the roof panel so that the front edge of thepanel is facing the storage area.

2. Insert the roof panel sothat the outside frontedges line up betweenthe receiver covers.Push forward onthe roof panel untilit stops.

3. Gently place the roofpanel down so that theback pins on theroof panel drop into thereceivers in the backof the storage area.

Press down firmly to seat the pins in the receivers.

2-61

Installing the Roof Panel

{CAUTION:

An improperly attached roof panel may fall intoor fly off the vehicle. You or others could beinjured. After installing the roof panel, alwayscheck that it is firmly attached by pushing up onthe underside of the panel. Check now and thento be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstrippingmay be damaged. Always place the roof panel inthe stowage receivers after removing it fromthe vehicle.

In most cases, it makes it easier if two people re-installthe roof panel.

1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shifta manual transmission into NEUTRAL.

2. Check that the front release latches and the rearrelease latch on the vehicle’s roof opening are intheir opened positions before attempting toinstall the roof panel.

3. If the roof panel is stored in the rear storage area ofthe vehicle, grasp the rear edge of the roof panelwith both hands and gently lift it up and removeit from the storage area.

4. Carefully place the roof panel over the top of thevehicle.

5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to theweatherstrip on the back of the roof opening.Then align and fit the pins at the rear of the roofpanel inside the openings in the rear overheadweatherstrip. Gently lower the front edge of the roofpanel to the front of the roof opening.

2-62

6. Turn the front releasehandles inward so thatthey latch to theclosed position.

7. Push up on the handle of the rear roof releasehandle to latch its hook in the closed position.

8. Push and pull the roof panel up and down andside-to-side to ensure the roof panel is securelyinstalled.

Convertible Top

Convertible Top (Manual)For care and cleaning of the convertible top, seeConvertible Top on page 5-91 under “Service andAppearance Care”. High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

If the vehicle has this feature, the followingprocedures explain the proper operation of themanual convertible top.

2-63

The parts of the manual convertible top that are usedwhen lowering and raising it are:

A. Front Edge of the Convertible TopB. Rear Edge of the Convertible TopC. Tonneau Cover

Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage. Always closethe convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertible top when thereare objects in the storage area could damageit or break the glass rear window. Always verify thatno objects are in the storage area before loweringthe convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirtycan cause stains, mildew, and damage to theinside of your vehicle. Dry off the top beforelowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in coldweather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damagetop components. Do not lower the top in coldweather.

Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible topwhile the vehicle is in motion, you could damage thetop or the top mechanism. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manualtransmission in NEUTRAL before raising or loweringthe convertible top.

2-64

Lowering the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic

transmission into PARK (P) and set the parkingbrake. Shift a manual transmission into NEUTRALand set the parking brake.


3. Make sure the trunk is closed.

4. The convertible top front latch, located above theinside rearview mirror, must be unlocked. Pull theconvertible top front latch down and turn it clockwiseto unlock it.

5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertibletop off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward onthe rear edge (B) of the convertible top so it isvertical to the tonneau cover (C). The front edge (A)and rear edge (B) should be straight up.

2-65

6. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press thetonneau cover release button located on theunderside of the tonneau cover (C) behind thedriver’s seat. Then raise the tonneau cover (C).If the tonneau cover does not release andthree chimes are heard, check to make sure thetrunk lid is closed. Also, the cover will not release ifthe vehicle alarm is armed.

After pressing the release button, the driver’s andpassenger’s door glass should retract to thefull-down position.If the vehicle has lost battery power, the tonneaucover (C) can still be opened using the manualrelease cable.The tonneau cover emergency manual releasecable is located underneath the carpeting behind thepassenger’s seat head restraint, on the undersideforward edge of the tonneau cover. To accessthe cable, lift and pull back the carpeting. Also, seeHatch on page 2-14 for information on theemergency trunk release handle.

Notice: If you lower the convertible top into thestorage compartment and the rear edge of the top isnot in the full-down position, you could damagethe top. Always verify that the rear edge of theconvertible top is in the full-down position beforelowering the top into the storage compartment.

2-66

7. Pull the cable to release the tonneau cover. 8. Push forward on the front edge (A) of theconvertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of theconvertible top to be moved to its full-down position.

2-67

9. Then move the top rearward to its fully-storedposition.

10. After the top is stored, apply one even push on thecenter of the front edge (A) of the convertible top toassure that the top is fully retracted.

11. Close the tonneau cover (B) by pressing down on itwith a swift, firm motion.

Raising the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic

transmission into PARK (P) and set the parkingbrake. Shift a manual transmission into NEUTRALand set the parking brake.

2. Lower both windows.


4. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the tonneaucover release button, or use the manual releasecable if battery power has been lost. See Step6 under “Lowering the Manual Convertible Top”earlier in this section.After pressing the release button, the driver’s andpassenger’s door glass should retract to thefull-down position, if they have not already beenlowered.

5. Lift the tonneau cover.

2-68

6. Pull the convertible top up by firmly gripping thefront edge (A) near the center and applying abrisk upward and forward motion to get the top inthe full-up position.

7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to itsfull-up position by first raising the front edge (A).

8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by pushing it downwith a swift, firm motion.

9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top byfirst slightly pushing the front edge (A) of theconvertible top forward.

10. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top downfrom the outside of the vehicle, or pull the frontedge (A) of the convertible top down from the centerpull-down handle located in the inside of the vehicle.

2-69

11. Pull the top front latch handle down and turn itcounterclockwise to lock the convertible top.

Convertible Top (Power)For care and cleaning of the convertible top seeConvertible Top on page 5-91 under “Service andAppearance Care”. High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

To operate the power convertible top use the followingsteps.

Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage. Always closethe convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertible top when thereare objects in the storage area could damageit or break the glass rear window. Always verify thatno objects are in the storage area before loweringthe convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirtycan cause stains, mildew, and damage to theinside of your vehicle. Dry off the top beforelowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in coldweather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damagetop components. Do not lower the top in coldweather.

2-70


Lowering the Power Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an

automatic transmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmission intoNEUTRAL, and set the parking brake.

2. Make sure the trunk is closed and the rear trunkpartition in the rear storage area is in the fastenedupright position, and that no objects are forwardof the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” underRear Storage Area on page 2-56.

3. Release the convertible top front latch, locatedabove the inside rearview mirror, by pulling andturning it clockwise toward the driver’s door. Pushupward on the front edge. The windows willautomatically lower.

2-71

4. Push and hold thebottom of the powerconvertible top button,located to the left ofthe steering wheel, onthe instrumentpanel.

The windows will automatically lower and the convertibletop will lower into the rear of the vehicle. A chime willsound when the convertible top has lowered completely.If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief timedue to a new audio system equalization being loaded.

If the convertible top is operated multiple times, theengine should be running to prevent drain on thevehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) may display a messageregarding the power convertible top. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-55 for more information.

Raising the Power Convertible Top


1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift anautomatic transmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmission intoNEUTRAL and set the parking brake.

2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed and the rear trunkpartition in the rear storage area is in the fastenedupright position, and that no objects are forwardof the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” underRear Storage Area on page 2-56.

3. Push and hold the top of the power convertible topbutton. The top will raise and the windows will lowerif they were in the raised position. A chime willsound when the top is raised completely.

2-72

4. After the convertible top is completely raised,release the power convertible top button.

5. Pull the convertible front top latch down and turn itcounterclockwise to lock the convertible top.

If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brieftime due to a new audio system equalization beingloaded.

If the vehicle has lost power, the convertible top can stillbe raised by releasing pressure on the hydraulicpump, located under the passenger’s side of thetonneau cover, by using the following steps. The carpetliner on the passenger’s side must be pulled back toaccess the hydraulic pump.

Manual operation of the power convertible top cannotbe attempted for five minutes from the last time theconvertible top button was pressed if the top isnot completely stowed, with the top down and thetonneau latched, or closed, with the front top latchlocked in place, at the time the convertible top buttonwas released.

2-73

1. Open the tonneau cover by pulling the emergencyrelease cable.The tonneau cover emergency release cable islocated behind the passenger’s seat head restraint,on the underside forward edge of the tonneaucover. Also, see Hatch on page 2-14 for informationon the emergency trunk release handle.

Be careful when opening the tonneau cover by hand.If the tonneau cover is opened quickly, damage canoccur to the hinging mechanism, which can preventproper operation of the convertible top.

2. Locate the pressure release bolt on the front side ofthe hydraulic pump.

2-74

3. Use the wrench, located in the console, and turnthe pressure release bolt counterclockwise onerevolution, to relieve pressure to the hydraulicpump. This will allow you to manually raisethe convertible top.

4. Then follow the steps under raising the manualconvertible top. See “Convertible Top (Manual)”under Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-63or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-70.

When power is restored to the vehicle, the hydraulic boltmust be tightened, by turning it clockwise. The powerconvertible top button can then be used to lower or raisethe convertible top.

If the power convertible top is operated multiple times,the engine should be running to prevent drain onthe vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) may display a messageregarding the power top. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55 for more information.

If the battery has been disconnected, the powerwindows must be initialized for the power top tooperate. See Power Windows on page 2-17 formore information.

2-75

✍ NOTES

2-76

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8Turn and Lane-Change Signals (Auto Signal) .....3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9Windshield Washer .......................................3-10Cruise Control ..............................................3-11Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-16Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-18Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-19Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-19Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-19Reading Lamps ............................................3-19Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-20Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-24

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-25Climate Controls ............................................3-25

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-25Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-31

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-32Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-33Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-34Tachometer .................................................3-34Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-34Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-35Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-36Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-38One-to-Four Shift Light

(Manual Transmission) ...............................3-38Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-39Antilock Brake System

Warning Light ...........................................3-40Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ...........................................3-40Active Handling System Light .........................3-41Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-42Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-42Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-43Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-46

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Security Light ...............................................3-47Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-47Lights On Reminder ......................................3-47Highbeam On Light .......................................3-47Fuel Gage ...................................................3-48

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-50DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-55Other Messages ...........................................3-71DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-72

Audio System(s) .............................................3-81Setting the Time ...........................................3-82Radio(s) ......................................................3-82Using an MP3 ..............................................3-96XM Radio Messages ...................................3-100Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-101Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-101Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-101Radio Reception .........................................3-102Diversity Antenna System .............................3-103XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-103

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.B. Head-Up Display Controls (If Equipped).

See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-20.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. CruiseControl. See Cruise Control on page 3-11. FogLamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17. HeadlampControls. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-15.

D. Manual Shift Paddles (If Equipped). See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 2-26.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-49.

F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-33.

G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-101.

H. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See WindshieldWipers on page 3-9 and Windshield Washeron page 3-10.

I. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See DICOperation and Displays on page 3-50.

J. Center Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 3-30.

K. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-6.

L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-81.M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate

Control System on page 3-25.N. Fuel Door Release Button. See Filling the Tank on

page 5-8. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release” under Hatch on page 2-14.

O. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 3-19.

P. Power Folding Top Switch (If Equipped).See Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-63 orConvertible Top (Power) on page 2-70.

Q. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.R. Telescopic Wheel Button (If Equipped). See Tilt

Wheel on page 3-7.S. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-22.T. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). See Heated

Seats on page 1-4.U. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown). See Automatic

Transmission Operation on page 2-26 or ManualTransmission Operation on page 2-31.

V. Active Handling Button. See Active Handling Systemon page 4-7.

W. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-24.

3-5

X. Selective Ride Control. See Selective Ride Controlon page 4-10.

Y. Center Console Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) onpage 2-55.

Z. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 3-25.

AA. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-34.AB. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-55.AC. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument Panel

Fuse Block on page 5-96.

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatednear the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatmode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

3-6

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highest levelto give your legs more room when you exit and enterthe vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel islocated on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull thelever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortableposition and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Telescopic Steering ColumnIf your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steeringcolumn will allow you to adjust the distance the steeringwheel is from the instrument panel.

The telescopic steeringcolumn switch is locatedon the right side ofthe steering column.

To operate the telescopic steering column, push theswitch forward and the wheel will move away from you.Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will movetoward you

The telescopic steering column position can bestored with your memory settings. See Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-4 for moreinformation.

3-7

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and

Lane-Change Signals (Auto Signal) on page 3-8.• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17.

• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 3-9.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 3-11.

• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 3-15.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals(Auto Signal)The turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all theway up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Release the lever andthe turn signal will automatically flash three times.If more flashes are desired, continue to hold the lever.

If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows flashfaster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-outbulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96.

3-8

Turn Signal on ChimeA chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on formore than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km) of driving.

If you need to leave the turn signal on for more thanthree-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), turn off the signaland then turn it back on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to high,push the turn signal lever all the way forward. To changefrom high to low beam, pull the lever rearward.

While the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panel clusterwill also be lit.

Flash-to-PassTo use the flash-to-pass feature, briefly pull the turnsignal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator flashesto indicate to the other driver that you intend to pass.If the low-beam headlamps are off and the fog lamps areon, the fog lamps flash.

Windshield Wipers

Use the lever located on the right side of the steeringcolumn to operate the windshield wipers.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position forsteady wiping at high speed.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position forsteady wiping at low speed.

& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to set adelay between wipes.

x (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to thisposition to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turnthe intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay orup for a shorter delay. The wiper speed can only bemanually adjusted when the lever is in this position.

3-9

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mistand release for a single wiping cycle. The windshieldwipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,hold the band on mist longer.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If thisoccurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until themotor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snowfrom the windshield wiper blades before using them.If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen them or warm the windshield before turningthe wipers on. If your blades do become worn ordamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield WasherThe lever on the right side of the steering column alsocontrols the windshield washer. There is a button at theend of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,press the button and hold it. The washer will spray untilyou release the button. The wipers will continue to clearthe window for about six seconds after the button isreleased and then stop or return to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir islow, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It willtake 15 seconds after the bottle is refilled for thismessage to turn off. For information on the correctwasher fluid to use, see Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-41 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-11.

3-10

Cruise Control

Your vehicle has cruisecontrol.

9 (Off): Slide the switch to this position to turn thesystem off.

R (On): Slide the switch to this position to turn thesystem on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Slide the switch to thisposition to make the vehicle accelerate or resume apreviously set speed.

T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever toset the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot onthe accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruisecontrol does not work at speeds below about25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control, and has the TractionControl System (TCS), and it begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control automatically disengages. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you canturn cruise control back on.

3-11

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the cruise control is engaged, the CRUISE SETTO XX MPH message displays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Other Messages on page 3-71.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,disengages the cruise control. But you do not needto reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehiclekeeps going faster until you release the switch or applythe brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate,unless you want the vehicle to go faster.

3-12

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the acceleratorpedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.If the accelerator pedal is held longer than60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed desired, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl• Press and hold the set button until you reach the

lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe set button. Each time you do this, you will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicleslows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, you might want to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. Whengoing downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lowergear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of course,applying the brake turns off the cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

3-13

Cruise Control in Sport (S) and ManualPaddle Shift Gear SelectionWhen your vehicle is in Sport (S) and the manualpaddle shift controls are not being used, cruise controloperates in the same manner as Drive (D).

When your vehicle is in Sport (S) and the manualpaddle shift controls are being used, cruise controloperates as follows:

• If cruise control is active and a gear is selectedwith the manual paddle shift controls, the vehiclemaintains vehicle speed in the driver selected gearand will not automatically up-shift or down-shift thetransmission while the driver’s gear selection isactive.

• If driving in hilly terrain, cruise control may not beable to maintain vehicle speed if an up-shift ordown-shift is not selected by the driver. While drivingon hilly terrain and cruise control is active with amanual paddle shift gear selection, the driver mustselect the proper gear for the terrain or select Drive(D) on the gear range selector for full automatictransmission operation.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,lightly tapping the clutch will also end a cruise controlsession.

Move the cruise control switch to off to turn the systemcompletely off.

When cruise control is disengaged, the CRUISEDISENGAGED message displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-14

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is located to the left of thesteering wheel on the multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with thissymbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has four positions:

O (Off): Turn the band to this position to turn offall lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the band to this positionto set the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTOmode turns the exterior lamps on and off dependingon how much light is available outside the vehicle.

To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.

To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exteriorlamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode alsoresets when your vehicle is turned off and then back onagain if the control is left in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to this positionturns on the parking lamps together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

The parking brake indicator light comes on and stayson when the parking lamps are on with the engineoff and the ignition to Acc.

5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this positionturns on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

3-15

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers have been in usefor approximately 15 seconds and deactivates andreturns to ambient lighting conditions 15 secondsafter the wipers are turned off.

If the exterior lamp control has been turned off or isin the parking lamp position while the wiper control isactive in any position, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage appears on the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off.

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp controlis left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp positionand the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,but they can be especially helpful in the short periodsafter dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system will make the front turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P) or theparking brake is off.

• The parking brake is off or the vehicle speed isgreater than 8 mph (13 km/h).

When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps willbe on. No other exterior lamps such as the parkinglamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are beingused. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.

When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps turn off and the normal low-beam headlampsturn on.

3-16

When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps go off,and the front turn signal lamps will take over. If thevehicle is started in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Oncethe vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.Make sure the instrument panel brightness knob is in thefull bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness onpage 3-19 for more information.

If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp controlis off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message willdisplay on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55.

Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second time, orturning on the headlamps will remove the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message in the DIC. If the parkinglamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead, theHEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continueto be displayed.

The regular headlamp system should be turned onwhen needed.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to theoff position or shift into PARK (P). The DRL will stayoff until the control is toggled again or the vehicleis shifted out of PARK (P).

This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in theUnited States.

Fog LampsUse fog lamps for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions.

The fog lamps control is located on the multifunctionlever next to the exterior lamp control.

- (Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position willturn the fog lamps on.

When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light willappear on the instrument panel cluster to indicatethat the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.

If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lampswill turn off. They will turn on again when you switchto low-beam headlamps.

The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps tobe on along with the fog lamps.

3-17

Twilight Sentinel®

Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you.A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes theTwilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.

With Twilight Sentinel®, you will see the followinghappen:

• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps andparking lamps will come on. The other lampsthat come on with headlamps will also come on.

• When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switchis in the AUTO position.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Once youleave the garage, it will take about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, your instrument panel clustermay not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrumentpanel brightness control is in full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19.

You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even whenit is dark outside.

After starting the vehicle, turn the exterior lamp controlband on the multifunction lever to off and then release it.The lamps will remain off until you turn the control band tooff again.

Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination asyou leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turnedon the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lampswill remain on until:

• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to theparking lamp position, or

• A delay time that you select has elapsed.

See “Personal Options” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-72 to select the delay timethat you want. You can also select no delay time.

If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switchin the parking lamp or headlamp position, the TwilightSentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn offas soon as the switch is turned off.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

3-18

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been lefton, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the ignitionis turned off or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. This protects against draining the battery incase you have accidentally left the headlamps orparking lamps on. The battery saver does not workif the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switchis turned to off.

If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lampcontrol to turn the lamps back on.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The knob for this feature islocated on the left side ofthe instrument panel.

Push the knob in to turn on the interior lights.

Turn and hold the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them. During the day, this knobwill adjust the instrument panel brightness and at nightwill adjust all interior lighting.

Be sure not to have this knob turned all the waydown with the lamps on during the day. Your DriverInformation Center (DIC) may not be visible.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, theinterior lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.

You can also turn the courtesy lamps on and offby pressing the instrument panel brightness knob.

Entry/Exit LightingWith entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on whenentering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come onfor about 20 seconds when the engine is off.

You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turningthe courtesy lamps on and off.

Reading LampsThe inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.The lamps will go on when a door is opened. Whenthe doors are closed, each lamp can be turned onindividually by pressing the switch for that lamp.

An ambient light is located in the passenger sun visorclip. This light stays on while driving to keep thecabin from being too dark.

3-19

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent the batteryfrom being drained in case any of the followinglamps are left on; the underhood lamp, if your vehiclehas this feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps,reading lamps, console or glove box lamps. If any ofthese lamps are left on, they will automatically time-outafter about 10 minutes. To reset it, all of the abovelamps must be turned off or the ignition key on.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high inyour field of view, it may take you more timeto see things you need to see when it is darkoutside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dimand placed low in your field of view.

If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), you cansee some of the driver information that appears onthe instrument panel cluster.

The information may be displayed in English or metricunits and appears as an image focused out towardthe front of the vehicle. The HUD consists of thefollowing information:

• Speedometer

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

• Tachometer

• Manual Paddle Shift Gear Indicator (If Equipped)

These displays on the HUD are for use whenusing the manual paddle shift controls to shiftthe transmission. See “Manual Paddle Shift” inAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26.

• Shift Light

This light is used for performance driving to indicatethat the vehicle’s best performance level has beenreached to shift the transmission into the next highergear. An arrow pointing up will light up on the displayjust prior to reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode.This cut-off is about 6,500 RPM for the LS3 engineand 7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.

• Check Gages Warning

• Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

3-20

• Transmission Fluid Temperature Gage,(Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only)

• Engine Oil Temperature Gage

• Engine Oil Pressure Gage

• G-Force Gage

• Audio Functions, Street Mode Only

• Navigation, Only with Navigation Radio,Turn-by-Turn Guidance

There are three HUD modes that you can choose to viewin the HUD display. By pressing the MODE button, youcan scroll through these modes in the following order:

Street Mode supportsaudio and navigationfunctions with your choiceof tachometer settings.

Track Mode 1 supports theG-Force gage and minorgages with a circulartachometer.

Track Mode 2 supportsG-Force gages and minorgages with a lineartachometer.

When the desired HUD display has been selected,release the MODE button.

3-21

Within each mode, the display, can be furthercustomized by pressing the PAGE button. Pressing thisbutton in each mode will turn off and on the following:

• Street Mode — No tachometer, circular tachometer,and linear tachometer.

• Track Modes 1 and 2 — No minor gage, coolanttemperature, transmission oil temperature, engineoil temperature, and engine oil pressure.While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the maximum G valueachieved during the current ignition cycle can bedisplayed by pressing and holding the PAGE button.The maximum G display will be shown until thePAGE button is released. The maximum G valuedisplay will be identical to the normal G valuedisplay, except the maximum G gage digits (X.XX G)and corresponding G gage bar will overwrite thecurrent G value.

Be sure to continue scanning the displays, controls anddriving environment just as you would in a vehicle withoutHUD. If you never look at your instrument panel cluster,you may miss something important, such as a warninglight. Under important warning conditions, the CHECKGAGES warning will illuminate in the HUD. View yourDriver Information Center (DIC) for more information.

3-22

The HUD controls arelocated to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do thefollowing:

1. Start the engine and press the HUD dimmer controlall the way up by pressing the (+) button.The brightness of the HUD image is determined bythe light conditions in the direction the vehicle isfacing and where you have the HUD dimmer controlset. If you are facing a dark object or a heavilyshaded area, your HUD may anticipate that youare entering a dark area and may begin to dim.It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD making itdifficult to see the image. The display will return tonormal when the sunlight is no longer enteringthe HUD.

2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.If you change your seat position later, you mayhave to re-adjust your HUD.

3. Press the up or down arrows to center the HUDimage in your view.The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,not side-to-side.

4. Press the dimmer control downward until the HUDimage is no brighter than necessary.

To turn HUD off, press and hold the (–) button until theHUD display turns off.

If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, youmay need to adjust the HUD brightness againusing the dimmer control. Polarized sunglassescould make the HUD image harder to see.

The HUD information can be displayed in one ofsix languages including English, Spanish, French,German, Italian or Japanese. The speedometercan be displayed in either English or Metric units.

To change the language and unit selections, see“OPTION” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-50.

Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to removeany dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image.

3-23

To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on asoft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dryit. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens becausethe cleaner could leak into the unit.

If the ignition is on and you can not see the HUDimage, check to see if:

• Something is covering the HUD unit.

• The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.

• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.

• Ambient light is low, in the direction your vehicle isfacing.

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-96.

Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See Windshield Replacement on page 5-55.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlet can be used to connectelectrical equipment such as a cellular phone orCB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located inside the centerconsole storage compartment, on the forward left side.

To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When notusing it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in foran extended period of time while the vehicle is offwill drain the battery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experiencea problem, see your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theinstallation instructions included with the equipment.

We recommend that you see a qualified technician oryour dealer/retailer for the proper installation of yourequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

3-24

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on theinstrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use theashtray, press on the indentation at the top of the door.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammableitems in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them and possibly damageyour vehicle. Never put flammable items in theashtray.

Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behindand beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movementof the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objectsnear the ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating does not let the lighter back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating can occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not holda cigarette lighter in while it is heating.

Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating, cooling,and ventilation for your vehicle.

When the vehicle is first started, the display will show thedriver’s temperature setting, the outside temperature, thefan speed and the air delivery, for about 10 seconds.

The outside temperature is shown in the center of thedisplay. The digital display will show the readings inFahrenheit or Celsius. See “Personal Options” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-72 for informationon changing your display.

3-25

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place theentire system in the automatic mode. When automaticoperation is active, the system will automatically controlthe inside temperature, the air delivery mode, and thefan speed.

After a ten second display of the current settings,the word AUTO, the driver’s temperature setting andthe outside temperature will be shown. The system willoperate to achieve your comfort set temperature asquickly as possible. The AUTO control system works bestwith the windows up and the removable roof installed orthe convertible top up.1. Press the AUTO button.2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting

between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C). Choosingthe coldest or warmest temperature setting willnot cause the system to heat or cool any faster.A setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fanspeeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicleuntil warmer air is available. The system will startout blowing air at the floor but may change modesautomatically as the vehicle warms up to maintainthe chosen temperature setting. The length of timeneeded for warm up will depend on the outsidetemperature and the length of time that has elapsedsince your vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,if necessary.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center ofthe instrument panel, near the windshield. For moreinformation on the solar sensor, see “Sensor” later inthis section.

Manual Operation

Driver Power/Temperature: Press the drivertemperature knob on the driver side of the climatecontrol panel to turn the climate control system off.This is the only setting that completely shuts offthe fan. The digital display will show only the outsidetemperature. You can still adjust the driver and thepassenger set temperature and the air intake modewhen the climate control is off.

Passenger Power/Temperature: Press the passengertemperature knob on the passenger side of the climatecontrol panel to turn the passenger’s climate controlsystem on or off. Turn the knob to increase or decreasethe temperature for the passenger. If the passenger’sclimate control system is off, the driver’s temperatureknob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.

3-26

N (MODE): Press this button to manually lock in thecurrent air delivery setting and to stop the automaticmode control. Pressing the MODE button will deleteAUTO from the digital display and the mode graphicswill be shown. To change the setting, press theMODE button again. The AUTO button must bepressed to return to the automatic mode selection.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs most of the air to theinstrument panel outlets, with a very small amount ofair directed to the floor outlets.

% (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and directs theremaining air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with some air directed to the side windowdefogger outlets and some air directed toward thewindshield.

The MODE button can also be used to select the defogmode. Information on defogging and defrosting canbe found later in this section.

x9w (Fan): Press the button with the fan symbolto manually increase or decrease the fan speed. Keeppressing the up or down arrow on this switch until thedesired fan speed appears on the display.

Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digitaldisplay. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will beshown. To increase the fan speed so that more air flowsinto the vehicle, press the up arrow on the fan switch.To decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the downarrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to return tothe automatic fan control.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-31 andScheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on or off. When the climate controlsystem is in recirculation mode an indicator light willcome on. This mode prevents outside air from enteringyour vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air andodors from entering your vehicle and to help cool the airinside your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode isnot available in defrost or defog mode.

^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press this button to turn theair conditioning compressor off. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation. When in AUTO, the air conditioningcompressor will come on automatically, as needed.

3-27

Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures belowabout 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). In temperatures above40°F (4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off indefrost and defog, as it helps to remove moisture fromthe vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.

You may notice a slight change in engine performancewhen the air-conditioning compressor shuts off andturns on again. This is normal. The system is designedto make adjustments to help with fuel economy whilestill maintaining the selected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days press the AUTO buttonand adjust the temperature to a cool, comfortable setting.To achieve maximum cool down, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select recirculation mode.

3. Select the A/C on.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside of your vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inyour vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This is normal.

SensorsThe solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solarradiation and uses the information to maintain theselected temperature when operating in AUTO mode byinitiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fanspeed and the air delivery system. The system may alsosupply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield or thesystem will not work properly.

There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.This sensor reads the outside air temperature andhelps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a falsereading in the temperature.

3-28

If the outside temperature goes up, the displayedtemperature will not change until:• The vehicle’s speed is above 12 mph (19 km/h) for

five minutes.• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (52 km/h) for

two and a half minutes.These delays prevent false readings. If the temperaturegoes down, the outside temperature will be shownwhen you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off forless than three hours, the temperature will be recalledfrom the previous vehicle operation.There is also an inside temperature sensor located tothe left of the ignition switch. The automatic climatecontrol system uses this sensor to receive information,so if you block or cover it, the system will not functionproperly.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidityand moisture condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system is usedproperly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost fromyour windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.Use defrost to remove fog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. To prevent fogging on the inside of thewindows in modes other than floor/defog and defrost,make sure the air conditioning compressor is on andrecirculation mode is off.

Press the mode button until the defog mode appears onthe display.

- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air equallybetween the windshield and the floor outlets with a smallamount to the side window outlets. When you selectthis mode, the system turns off recirculation and runsthe air-conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.

1 (Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of theair to the windshield, with a small amount directed to theside window outlets. The light on the button will come onand the digital display will show the defrost mode symboland fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used.In this mode, the system will automatically turn off therecirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor,unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrostmode. Pressing this button again will return the systemto the last operating mode.

For severe ice conditions, turn the driver’s temperatureknob to 90°F (32°C) while in defrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-29

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theengine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button toturn the rear window defogger on. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear window as possible.An indicator light in the button will come on to let youknow that the rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed when traveling less than30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defoggerwill only run for about five minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors.The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors when the rear window defogbutton is pressed.

If your vehicle has the power convertible top, the rearwindow defogger and heated mirrors are automaticallydisabled when the power convertible top is movingor down.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the insideof the rear window. If you do, you could cut ordamage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Do not attacha temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal oranything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the tab located on the air outlets to change thedirection of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the area around the base of the instrumentpanel console and air path under the seats clearof objects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

3-30

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter removes certainparticles from the air including pollen and dust particles.Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often industy areas, indicate that the filter may need to bereplaced. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for information on how often to replace the filter.

Notice: Driving without a passenger compartmentair filter in place can cause water and smallparticles, like paper and leaves, to be pulled intoyour climate control system which may causedamage to it. Make sure you always replace theold filter with a new one.

The passenger compartment air filter is located on thepassenger side of the engine compartment near thebattery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-14.

To check or replace the air filter, do the following:

1. Undo the passenger compartment air filter housingcover retainer clips (A).

2. Remove the passenger compartment air filterhousing cover.

3-31

3. Remove the passenger compartment air filter fromthe housing.

4. Insert the new filter into the housing.5. Reinstall the passenger compartment air filter

housing cover.6. Attach the passenger compartment air filter housing

cover retainer clips.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages that maybe on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an

expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to yourwarning lights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, some warninglights come on briefly when you start the engine just to letyou know they are working. If you are familiar with thissection, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to let you know when thereis a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center that worksalong with the warning lights and gages. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-49.

3-32

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance howthe vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have left and manyother things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicatorwarning lights, gages and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.

United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada, Automatic Transmission and Z06 Model similar

3-33

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in eithermiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).For more information see “Personal Options” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-72.

To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on theparking lamps.

If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the mileage total of the new odometer will be setto the original miles (kilometers) of the old odometer.See your dealer/retailer if the odometer must bereplaced in your vehicle.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed in thousandsof revolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: Fuel will shut off at about 6500 rpm for thebase model and 7000 rpm for the Z06 model. If youcontinue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off rpm,you could damage your engine. Be sure to operateyour vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduceyour rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a chime will come on forseveral seconds to remind people to fasten their safetybelts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s beltis already buckled, neither the chime nor the light willcome on.

3-34

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panelcluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 1-44.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. The lightshould go out and thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you startthe vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the airbagreadiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a few secondswhen you start the engine. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problemwith the airbag system, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message may also come on. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-55 for moreinformation.

3-35

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag statusindicator.

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicator will

light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,to let you know the status to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags (if equipped).

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you have arear-facing child restraint installed in the rightfront passenger’s seat, it means that thepassenger sensing system has not turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.

United States

Canada

3-36

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is orairbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). See Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-52 for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there maybe a problem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrumentpanel cluster ever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have the protectionof the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-35 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

3-37

Voltmeter Gage

The voltmeter shows thevoltage output of yourbattery. When the engineis running, it showsthe voltage output ofthe charging system.

The reading will change as the rate of charge changes(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeterreads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel clusterand other systems may shut down. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) will read BATTERY VOLTAGELOW when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have itchecked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at10 volts or below could drain your battery and disableyour vehicle.

One-to-Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

When this light comes on,you can only shift fromFIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)instead of FIRST (1) toSECOND (2).

You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn offthis feature. This helps you get the best possible fueleconomy.

After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to alower gear if you prefer.

Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear exceptFOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comeson may damage the transmission. Shift only fromFIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.

This light will come on when:

• The engine coolant temperature is higher than169°F (76°C),

• the vehicle is going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and

• the vehicle 21 percent throttle or less.

3-38

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well.

This light should come on when you start the engine.If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,the parking brake may still be set or there could bea brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-34to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, haveyour brake system inspected right away.

If the light comes on while you are driving and you have aCHECK BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer tothe floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 4-29 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properlyif the brake system warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning light on can leadto an accident. If the light is still on after youhave pulled off the road and stopped carefully,have the vehicle towed for service.

United States Canada

3-39

Antilock Brake SystemWarning Light

For vehicles withthe Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), thislight will come on brieflywhen you start the engine.

That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the lightcomes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you donot have antilock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakesand there is a problem with your regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-39

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55 for allbrake related DIC messages.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

This light should come onbriefly as you start theengine. If the light does notcome on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

If it stays on, or comes on and the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) shows a SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMmessage when you are driving, there is a problemwith your Traction Control System (TCS) and yourvehicle needs service. When this light is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.If the driver turns off the TCS by pressing the buttonon the console, the TCS light will come on and theTRACTION SYSTEM OFF message will show on theDIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55for more information.

3-40

Active Handling System LightThe Active Handling System light will come on brieflyas you start the engine. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem. This light will also come on whenthe ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING messageis displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).

If the light stays on orcomes on while you aredriving, a chime soundsand a SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING SYSTEMmessage appears on theDIC, there is a problemwith your Active HandlingSystem and your vehicleneeds service.

The driver can acknowledge this message by pressingthe RESET button. When the SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING SYSTEM message is displayed in the DIC,the Active Handling System will not assist you incontrolling the vehicle. You should have the systemserviced as soon as possible. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVEHANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may alsofeel or hear the system working. This is normal.

If the driver turns off the Active Handling System bypressing the button on the console for five seconds,the Active Handling System light will come on, a chimewill sound, and the TRACTION SYSTEM ANDACTIVE HANDLING – OFF message will be displayedin the DIC. The Traction Control System will also beturned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-55 for more information.

If the Active Handling System and the Traction ControlSystem are off, pressing the console button momentarilywill turn both systems on. The DIC will display theTRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING – ONmessage, the instrument cluster light will be off, anda chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for more information.

3-41

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,your engine is too hot.

This means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle under normaldriving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop yourvehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-31 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.

This light will also come on when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.

A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center(DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 5-58 for more information.

If a problem is detected with the Tire PressureMonitor System, this light will flash for approximately60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 5-68 for more information.


3-42

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makessure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life ofthe vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

The check engine lightcomes on to indicatethat there is an OBD IIproblem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. This can prevent more seriousdamage to your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This couldalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it isworking, as you start the engine. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light also comeson during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand could damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service mightbe required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

3-43

If the Light Is FlashingThe following can prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If theLight Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps, and see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou might be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install thecap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.The condition is usually corrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few driving trips should turn thelight off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run as efficiently as designed. Youmight notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling whenyou put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — theseconditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.This will be detected by the system and cause the lightto turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that might have developed.

3-44

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

To perform a check engine light bulb check with thekeyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in thepassenger compartment. See Ignition Positions onpage 2-22. Press the bottom of the Acc. button on theinstrument panel and hold the button down for fiveseconds. The instrument panel, including the check

engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on,but the engine will not start — if you press the bottomof the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,the accessory power mode will be turned on, but notthe ignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press andrelease the Acc. button again to turn the ignition offand avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced the battery or if the batteryhas run down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systems during normaldriving. This may take several days of routine driving.If you have done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, yourdealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-45

Engine Oil Pressure Gage The engine oil pressure gage shows the engineoil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) orkPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hotdays, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and stillbe considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readingsabove the shaded area show the normal operatingrange. Readings in the shaded area tell you that theengine is low on oil, or that you might have some otheroil problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-17.The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using theGAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-49.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.If you do, your engine can become so hot thatit catches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual for changing engine oil.


United States — Z06Model

Canada — Z06 Model

3-46

Security Light

For information regardingthis light and the vehicle’ssecurity system, seeTheft-Deterrent Systemon page 2-18.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-16 for moreinformation.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9for more information.

3-47

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left whenthe engine is on.

When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, achime will sound and LOW FUEL will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. At this time, youstill have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.

Press the RESET button to acknowledge a DICmessage(s). Pressing the RESET button will alsoturn off a DIC message but the LOW FUEL messagewill come on again in 10 minutes if you have not addedfuel to the vehicle.

Here are five things that some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off beforethe gage reads the full symbol.

• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gagereads. For example, the gage reads half full, but ittook more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacityto fit it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering, brakingor speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty whenthe ignition is turned off.

• The gage reading may change slightly within the firstseveral minutes after starting the vehicle.

See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50 for moreinformation.

3-48

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the statusof many of your vehicle’s systems. It is also used todisplay driver personalization features and warning/statusmessages. The DIC display is located on the instrumentpanel cluster below the speedometer and tachometer,directly above the steering column. The DIC buttonsare located on the instrument panel, to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is turned on.After displaying CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the DICwill display the current driver and the information thatwas last displayed before the engine was turned off.

If a problem is detected, a warning message will appearon the DIC display. Be sure to take any message thatappears on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD) andyou use the Manual Paddle Shift feature, the gearwill display in the HUD, except if your vehicle hasthe Navigation system and the HUD is displayingturn-by-turn guidance information. If the HUD isdisplaying turn-by-turn guidance information, thegear instead displays in the DIC. See “Manual PaddleShift” under Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 2-26 and “Head-Up Display (HUD)” in the indexof the Navigation system manual for more information.

3-49

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modeswhich can be accessed by pressing the following buttonslocated on the instrument panel, to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

.4 (Fuel): Press this button to display fuel informationsuch as fuel economy and range.

2 (Gages): Press this button to display gageinformation like oil pressure and temperature, coolanttemperature, automatic transmission fluid temperature, ifequipped, battery voltage, and front/rear tire pressures.

TRIP: Press this button to display your total andtrip distance driven, the elapsed time function, youraverage speed, and the engine oil life.

OPTION: Press this button to choose personal optionsthat are available on your vehicle, depending on theoptions your vehicle is equipped with, such as doorlocks, easy entry seats, and language.

RESET: Press this button, used along with the otherbuttons, to reset system functions, select personaloptions, and turn off or acknowledge messages onthe DIC.

3-50

FUEL ButtonThe fuel button displays average fuel economy andinstantaneous fuel economy, calculated for your specificdriving conditions, and range information.

Average Fuel Economy: The average fuel economyis viewed as a long-term approximation of your overalldriving conditions. You should reset the average fueleconomy display every time you refuel. If you press theRESET button in this mode while you are driving, thesystem will reset this display and begin figuring fueleconomy from that point in time.

Press the fuel button to display average fuel economy,such as:

• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or

• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km

Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Instantaneous fueleconomy reflects only the fuel economy that the vehiclehas right now and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,this menu item cannot be reset.

Press the fuel button again to display instantaneous fueleconomy, such as:

• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or

• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km

Fuel Range: The range calculates the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling. It is basedon fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

Press the fuel button again to display the range,such as:

• RANGE 30 MI or

• RANGE 48 km

If the LOW FUEL warning is displayed or if RANGEis less than 40 miles (64 km), the display will readRANGE LOW.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range isan average of recent driving conditions. As your drivingconditions change, this data is gradually updatedautomatically.

If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, therange displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.The vehicle must be driven 5–10 miles (8–16 km) to getan accurate reading.

3-51

GAGES ButtonThe gages button displays oil pressure, oil temperature,coolant temperature, transmission fluid temperaturefor automatic transmission vehicles only, battery voltage,and tire pressure information.

Oil Pressure: This display shows the oil pressure.

Press the gages button to display the oil pressure,such as:

• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or

• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa

Oil Temperature: This display shows the oiltemperature.

Press the gages button again to display the oiltemperature, such as:

• OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F or

• OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C

If the oil temperature is low, the display will show OILTEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil temperature is high,the display will show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.

Coolant Temperature: This display shows the enginecoolant temperature.

Press the gages button again to display the coolanttemperature, such as:

• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 123°F or

• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 51°C

If the coolant temperature is low, the display will showCOOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW. If the coolanttemperature is high, the display will show COOLANTTEMPERATURE HIGH.

Transmission Fluid Temperature: If you have anautomatic transmission vehicle, this display shows theautomatic transmission fluid temperature.

Press the gages button again to display the automatictransmission fluid temperature, such as:

• TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F or

• TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C

If the transmission fluid temperature is low, the displaywill show TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the transmissionfluid temperature is high, the display will show TRANSFLUID TEMP HIGH.

3-52

Battery Voltage: This display shows the current batteryvoltage.

Press the gages button again to display the batteryvoltage, such as:

• BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.5 VOLTS

Tire Pressure: This display shows the tire pressure foreach tire.

Press the gages button again to display the tire pressurefor the front tires, such as:

• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or

• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa

Press the gages button again to display the tire pressurefor the rear tires, such as:

• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or

• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa

TRIP ButtonThe TRIP button displays the odometer, trip distance,elapsed time, average speed, and oil life remaininginformation.

Odometer: The odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven in either miles or kilometers. Pressthe TRIP button to display odometer readings, such as:

• ODOMETER 12345 MI or

• ODOMETER 20008 km

You can also display the odometer by turning on theparking lamps.

Trip Odometers: There are two trip odometers.Press the TRIP button to display TRIP ODOMETER Areadings and press the button again to display TRIPODOMETER B readings, such as:

• TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI or

• TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km

• TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI or

• TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km

Both of the trip odometers can be used simultaneously.TRIP A could be used to track the distance to adestination. TRIP B could be used to track maintenanceperiods. The trip odometers can be reset by pressing theRESET button on the DIC.There is also a miles since last ignition feature thatdisplays the number of miles (kilometers) driven sinceyou last started the vehicle. Press and hold the RESETbutton for three seconds, then release it. The miles(kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set intothe trip odometer.

3-53

Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIP button until ELAPSEDTIMER is displayed, such as ELAPSED TIMER .00.

When the ignition is in on, the DIC can be usedas a stopwatch. The display can show hours, minutesand seconds. The elapsed time indicator will recordup to 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then itwill reset to zero and continue counting. The displayappears as ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsedtime function.

You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressingthe RESET button. To reset the elapsed time to zero,press the RESET button for three seconds whilethe timer is displayed.

Pressing and holding the RESET button for at least10 seconds will reset the timer display to the time sincelast ignition cycle.

Average Speed: Press the TRIP button until theaverage speed is displayed, such as:

• AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or

• AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h

Press and hold the RESET button to resetto 0.0 mph (km/h).

Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP button until the engineoil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAINING 89%.

This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaininguseful life. It will show 100% when the system is resetafter an oil change. It will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alertyou with the message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.

Remember, you must reset the engine oil life systemyourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life Systemon page 5-23. Be careful not to reset the engine oil lifesystem accidentally at any time other than when theoil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accuratelyuntil the next oil change.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and EngineOil on page 5-17 for more information.

OPTION ButtonThe OPTION button allows you to access thePERSONAL OPTIONS menu and customize thepersonalization settings on your vehicle. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-72 for more information.

RESET ButtonThe RESET button, used along with other buttons, willreset system functions and turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

3-54

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driverthat the status of the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by the driver to correctthe condition. Multiple messages may appear one afteranother. You can scroll through the messages that mayhave been sent at the same time. The DIC is continuouslyupdated with the vehicle performance status.

Some messages may not require immediate action,but you can press the RESET button to acknowledgethat you received the messages and to clear them fromthe display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can be cleared. You shouldtake any messages that appear on the display seriouslyand remember that clearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that can bedisplayed and some information about them.

ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVEThis message displays when the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to helpavoid a braking skid.

Slippery road conditions may exist if this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. Themessage stays on for a few seconds after the systemstops adjusting brake pressure. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 4-5 for more information.

ACTIVE HANDLINGThis message displays when the Active Handling Systemis operating. The Active Handling System is a computercontrolled system that assists the driver in controlling thevehicle in difficult driving conditions. You may feel or hearthe system working and see the ACTIVE HANDLINGmessage displayed in the DIC. This message stays onfor a few seconds following the active handling event.This is normal when the system is operating. See ActiveHandling System on page 4-7 and Braking on page 4-4.

3-55

ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATINGThis message displays and the active handling systemlight on the instrument panel cluster turns on while thesystem is calibrating after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)for 10 seconds. See Active Handling System Light onpage 3-41. The Active Handling System is not functionalyet. The Active Handling System performance is affecteduntil the next message ACTIVE HANDLING READY isdisplayed. The Active Handling System is off until theACTIVE HANDLING READY message is displayed.See Active Handling System on page 4-7 for moreinformation.

ACTIVE HANDLING READYThis message displays when the functional check ofthe Active Handling System has been completed.See Active Handling System on page 4-7 for moreinformation.

ACTIVE HANDLING WARMING UPThis message may display when you first start yourvehicle during cold winter weather, and begin to driveaway, up to 6 mph (10 km/h). This is normal. The ActiveHandling System performance is affected until thenext message ACTIVE HANDLING READY is displayedin the DIC. See Active Handling System on page 4-7for more information.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.

ATTACH TRUNK PARTITIONIf your vehicle has a power convertible top, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if the trunk partition isnot in place. Open the hatch/trunk and make sure thetrunk partition is secure and no objects are on the trunkpartition. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-56 formore information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the vehicle has detectedthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonablepoint. The battery saver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.At the point that features are disabled, this message isdisplayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessoriesto allow the battery to recharge.

BUCKLE PASSENGERThis message reminds you to buckle the passenger’ssafety belt.

This message displays and a chime sounds when theignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, thepassenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passengerairbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. Youshould have the passenger buckle their safety belt.

3-56

The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and thepassenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbagis enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is alreadybuckled, this message and chime will not come on.

BUCKLE SEATBELTThis message reminds you to buckle the driver’ssafety belt.

This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckleyour safety belt.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition ison and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder willbe repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is alreadybuckled, this message and chime will not come on.

This message is an additional reminder to the safetybelt reminder light in the instrument panel cluster.See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-34 for moreinformation.

CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message displays when the life of the engine oilhas expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.After an oil change, the engine oil life system mustbe reset. See “Engine Oil Life” under DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-50. Also, see Engine Oilon page 5-17 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-23for more information.

CHECK BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays, a chime sounds, and the brakesystem warning light on the instrument panel clusterturns on if the ignition is on to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-39. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakeson page 5-42.

CHECK COOLANT LEVELThis message displays when the engine coolant level islow. Have the cooling system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-28.

3-57

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has not been fullytightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that it is onproperly. Once tightened, it takes at least one overnightpark to reset or clear this message. If both the CHECKGAS CAP message and the malfunction indicator lamp inthe instrument panel cluster are on, you may need to seeyour dealer/retailer for service. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-43 for more information.

CHECK OIL LEVELOn some vehicles, this message displays andtwo chimes sound if the oil level in the vehicle is low.Once the vehicle senses a change in the engineoil level, the light remains off.

If this message appears after starting the engine,the engine oil level may be too low. You may needto add oil. See Engine Overheating on page 5-31.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.The message reappears every 10 minutes until thiscondition changes.

CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds if the trunkis open while you are trying to operate the convertibletop. Make sure the trunk is closed before operating theconvertible top. See Convertible Top (Manual) onpage 2-63 or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-70.

COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODEThis message displays and a short chime sounds whenthe Competitive Driving mode is selected. The instrumentpanel cluster light will not be on when the CompetitiveDriving mode is selected. The Traction Control System(TCS) will not be operating while in the CompetitiveDriving mode. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeRacing or Other Competitive Driving on page 4-15 formore information.

COOLANT OVER TEMPERATUREThis message displays and a chime sounds if the enginecoolant exceeds 255°F (124°C). If you have beenoperating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,pull off the road, stop your vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible.

3-58

You can monitor the coolant temperature with the gagesbutton on the DIC or the engine coolant temperaturegage on the instrument panel cluster. See EngineOverheating on page 5-31, DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-50, and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 3-42.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.The message reappears and a chime sounds everyminute until this condition changes. If you do not pressthe RESET button, the message remains on untilthe condition changes.

CRUISE DISENGAGEDThis message displays briefly when you disengagethe cruise control system by stepping on the brake onan automatic transmission vehicle or the clutch ona manual transmission vehicle, or by turning offthe cruise control switch. See Cruise Control onpage 3-11 for more information.

ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ACTIVEThis message displays when engine drag control isactive. When driving in a lower gear in rainy, snowy,or icy conditions and then letting up on the acceleratoror downshifting, the rear wheels may begin to slip andthis message displays. This message stays on fora few seconds following the engine drag control event.

ENGINE OVERHEATED – STOPENGINEThis message displays and a continuous chime soundswhen the engine has overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.See Engine Overheating on page 5-31.

ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCEENGINE RPMThis message displays if the engine oil temperatureexceeds 320°F (160°C). Check the engine coolanttemperature and engine oil level. If the engine is toohot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-31. Your vehiclemay need service, so see your dealer/retailer.

You can monitor the oil temperature with the gagesbutton on the DIC. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-50.

Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.This message remains displayed and active until theissue is resolved.

3-59

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays if it is dark enough outside andthe headlamps and the Twilight Sentinel® controlsare off. This message informs the driver that turning onthe exterior lamps is recommended. It has becomedark enough outside to require the headlamps and/orother exterior lamps.

HIGH TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when one or more of the tires isover-inflated. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR toindicate which tire is affected. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at a time. To read othermessages that may have been sent at the same time,press the RESET button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tireson page 5-64, Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-24,Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66, and Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-68. The DIC also shows thetire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-50.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.A message reappears every 10 minutes until thecondition is corrected.

HOT ENGINE AIR CONDITIONING OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressor is automatically turned off.When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/Coperation automatically resumes. You can continue todrive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soonas possible to avoid compressor damage.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside air temperatureis cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

LOW FUELThis message displays when the fuel tank is less than10 percent full and the display is turned off. A multiplechime also sounds when this message is displayed.Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gageon page 3-48.

3-60

LOW OIL PRESSUREThis message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.If this message appears while the engine is running,stop the engine and do not operate it until the causeof low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage tothe engine can result. A multiple chime sounds whenthis message is displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-17.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE

{CAUTION:

When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLATmessage is displayed on the Driver InformationCenter, your vehicle’s handling capabilities willbe reduced during severe maneuvers. Theactive handling system will be affected. SeeActive Handling System on page 4-7. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control of yourvehicle. You or others could be injured. Do notdrive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW TIREPRESSURE or TIRE FLAT message is displayed.Drive cautiously and check your tire pressuresas soon as you can.

This message displays when one or more of the tiresis under-inflated. This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REARto indicate which tire is affected. Multiple chimes soundand the tire pressure light on the instrument panel clusterturns on when this message is displayed. See TirePressure Light on page 3-42. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at a time. To read othermessages that may have been sent at the same time,press the RESET button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tireson page 5-64, Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-24,Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66, and Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-68. The DIC also shows thetire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-50.


MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h)This message displays when a malfunction is present inthe Selective Ride Control system. The vehicle speedwill be limited to a value determined by the vehicle whenthe shock absorber system has failed and the shocksare in their full soft mode. Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

3-61


NO FOBS DETECTEDThis message displays if the vehicle does not detectthe presence of a keyless access transmitter when youhave attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle doorhas just closed. The following conditions may causethis message to appear:

• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessorypower outlet on the center console is causinginterference. Examples of these devices are cellphones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,power inverters, or similar items. Try moving thekeyless access transmitter away from these deviceswhen starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devicesand remote garage and gate openers may alsogenerate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) thatmay interfere with the keyless access transmitter.Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in thesame pocket or bag as these devices.

• The vehicle is experiencing ElectromagneticInterference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,automatic toll booths, and some gas stations haveEMI fields which may interfere with the keylessaccess transmitter.

If moving the transmitter to different locations withinthe vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facingto the right and then press the START button.

• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The batteryvoltage must be above 10 volts for the keylessaccess transmitter to be detected properly.

3-62

NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?This message displays when the keyless accesstransmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while youare trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may benear a strong radio antenna signal causing the keylessaccess system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain inACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is restarted,or five minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off andyou cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you willnot be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless accesstransmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order forthe vehicle to start. See Starting the Engine on page 2-23for more information.

OPTIONS UNAVAILABLEThis message displays for a few seconds if a keylessaccess transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2 is used andyou try to personalize the features on your vehicle bypressing the OPTION button. The personalization systemwill not recognize the transmitter and the DIC will notdisplay the current driver number or the menus used toset personalizations. The personalization features willthen be set to the default states. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-72 for more information.

PRESS BRAKE TO START ENGINE(Automatic Transmission Only)This message displays if you try to start the engineby pressing the keyless ignition start button withouthaving the brake pressed. The brake needs to bepressed when starting the engine. See IgnitionPositions on page 2-22 for more information.

REDUCED ENGINE POWERIf this message displays and the check engine lightcomes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’sperformance may occur. If the REDUCED ENGINEPOWER message is displayed, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while theREDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethe check engine light stays on, the vehicle shouldbe taken to your dealer/retailer as soon as possiblefor diagnosis and repair. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-43 for more information.

3-63

Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.The message reappears every five minutes until thiscondition changes.

If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message isdisplayed in combination with the COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE message, see Engine Overheatingon page 5-31.

SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEMThis message displays if there is a problem with theActive Handling System and your vehicle needs service.The active handling system light on the instrumentpanel cluster also turns on and a chime sounds.See your dealer/retailer. When this message isdisplayed, the system is not working. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See Active Handling Systemon page 4-7 for more information.

SERVICE AIR CONDITIONINGThis message displays when the electronic sensorsthat control the air conditioning and heating systemsare no longer working. Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a dropin heating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKESIf this message displays while you are driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the message stayson, or comes back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer. Ifthe antilock brake system (ABS) warning light is on andthe regular brake system warning light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but do not have ABS. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, you do not have ABS andthere is a problem with the brakes. See Antilock BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-40 and Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-39.

If this message is displayed, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and the Active Handling System willalso be disabled. The DIC will scroll three messages:SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE TRACTIONSYSTEM, and SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, andthe instrument panel cluster lights will come on alongwith a chime. When the service message is displayed,the computer controlled systems will not assist thedriver. Have the system repaired by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To acknowledge these messages, press theRESET button.

3-64

SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEMIf this message displays while you are driving, there maybe a problem with the electrical charging system. It couldmean that there is a loose or broken drive belt or thatthere is another electrical problem. Have your vehiclechecked right away by your dealer/retailer. Driving whilethis message is on could drain the battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the message on,be certain to turn off the vehicle’s accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.


SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMThis message displays if an electrical problem hasoccurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE FUEL SYSTEMThis message displays if the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel system.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.This message also displays when the cluster isnot getting fuel information from the PCM.

SERVICE RIDE CONTROLThis message displays when the Selective Ride Controlsystem has detected a malfunction and the system mustbe serviced. See your dealer/retailer. If a fault is presentin the Selective Ride Control system which causes theshocks to be in their full soft condition, the messagesSERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE,and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will displaytogether. See Selective Ride Control on page 4-10 formore information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORThis message displays if a part on the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tirepressure light also flashes and then remains on duringthe same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 3-42. Several conditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-69 for more information. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.See your dealer/retailer.

3-65

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMIf this message displays when you are driving, there is aproblem with the Traction Control System (TCS) and yourvehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.When this message is displayed, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system (TCS) warning light onthe instrument panel cluster will also turn on anda chime will sound.

When this message is displayed, the computer controlledsystems will not assist the driver in controlling the vehicle.Have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soonas possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.


SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problem with thetransmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays and a chime sounds when theremay be an electrical or another system problem withyour vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer/retailer if this message keeps appearing.

SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has a manual transmission, this messagedisplays if you try to recall the memory positions whenthe ignition is on and the parking brake is not set. If thevehicle is on, you must set the parking brake in order forthe memory positions to recall. See Memory Seat, Mirrorsand Steering Wheel on page 1-4 for more information.

SET PARK BRAKE TO MOVE TOPIf your vehicle has a manual transmission, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if you try to operate thepower convertible top without first setting the parkingbrake. Set the parking brake before trying to operate thepower convertible top. See Convertible Top (Manual)on page 2-63 or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-70for more information.

SHIFT TO PARKIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thismessage displays if the vehicle is not in PARK (P)when the engine is being turned off. The vehicle willbe in ACCESSORY Once the shift lever is movedto PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.

The vehicle will remain in ACCESSORY, without the20 minute time-out period, until the shift lever is movedto PARK (P) or until the driver presses the pushbuttonto restart the vehicle. See Ignition Positions onpage 2-22 for more information.

3-66

SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARKBRAKE FOR TOPIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thismessage displays and a chime sounds if you try tooperate the power convertible top without first shiftinginto PARK (P) or setting the parking brake. Either shiftthe vehicle into PARK (P) or set the parking brakebefore trying to operate the power convertible top. SeeConvertible Top (Manual) on page 2-63 or ConvertibleTop (Power) on page 2-70 for more information.

SHOCKS INOPERATIVEThis message displays when a malfunction is presentin the Selective Ride Control system which is causingthe shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warningto the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible.


TIRE FLAT

{CAUTION:

When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLATmessage is displayed on the Driver InformationCenter, your vehicle’s handling capabilities willbe reduced during severe maneuvers. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control of yourvehicle. You or others could be injured. Do notdrive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOWTIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT message isdisplayed. Drive cautiously and check yourtire pressures as soon as you can.

This message displays when one or more of the tires isflat. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate whichtire is affected. Multiple chimes sound and the tirepressure light on the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen this message is displayed. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 3-42.

3-67

This message is followed by the MAXIMUM SPEED55 MPH (90 km/h) message, and then by the REDUCEDHANDLING message. The Active Handling Systemwill intervene more quickly when a flat tire has beendetected. Adjust your driving accordingly.

You can receive more than one tire pressure messageat a time. To read other messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tirepressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon asyou can. Have the tire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire Loading Information label. SeeRun-Flat Tires on page 5-64, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-24, Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66, andTire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-68. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-50.


TOO COLD TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe power convertible top button is pressed and thepower convertible top pump motor temperature is below−4°F (−20°C). Wait for the power convertible top pumpmotor to warm up before using the power convertible top.

TOP MOTOR OVER TEMPERATUREThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe power convertible top button is pressed and thepower convertible top pump motor temperature is over221°F (105°C). Wait for the power convertible toppump motor to cool down before using the powerconvertible top.

TOP NOT SECUREThis message displays and a chime sounds when thepower convertible top button is released before thetop open or close operation is complete or if the top isclosed without the header latch engaged. Press andhold the convertible top button to fully open or close thetop, and make sure that the header latch is engagedafter the top is closed.

TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVEThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this message is displayed, soadjust your driving accordingly. The message stays onfor a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheelspin. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6for more information.

3-68

TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING – OFFThis message displays, the instrument panel clusterlight turns on, and a chime sounds when the TractionControl System (TCS) and Active Handling Systemare turned off by pressing the Active Handling Systembutton on the console for five seconds. The AntilockBrake System (ABS) remains on with the TCS andActive Handling System off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6 and Active Handling System on page 4-7for more information.

To acknowledge this message, press the RESETbutton.

TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING – ONIf the Traction Control System (TCS) and ActiveHandling System are off, this message displays briefly,the instrument panel cluster light turns off, and achime sounds when the TCS and Active HandlingSystem are turned on by briefly pressing the ActiveHandling System button on the console. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-6 and Active HandlingSystem on page 4-7 for more information.

TRACTION SYSTEM – OFFThis message displays and stays on, a single, quicktone sounds, and the traction control system (TCS)warning light on the instrument panel cluster turns onwhen the TCS is turned off by pressing the ActiveHandling System button on the console. See TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-40.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6for more information.


TRACTION SYSTEM – ONThis message displays and a single, quick tone soundswhen the Traction Control System (TCS) is turnedon by pressing the Active Handling System button onthe console. This message automatically clears fromthe DIC display on its own. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.

3-69

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays and four chimes sound if thetransmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F (132°C)or rises rapidly. The transmission may shift gears orapply the torque converter clutch to reduce the fluidtemperature. Driving aggressively or driving on long hillscan cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higherthan normal. If this message appears, you may continueto drive at a slower speed. Monitor the transmission fluidtemperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F (110°C).The transmission fluid temperature can be monitored withthe gages button on the DIC. See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-50 and Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 5-27. Also check the engine coolanttemperature. If it is also hot, see Engine Overheatingon page 5-31.

If this message is displayed during normal vehicleoperation on flat roads, your vehicle may need service.See your dealer/retailer for an inspection.

If driving in a performance or competitive manner, theuse of (S) Sport Automatic Mode or (S) Sport ManualPaddle Shift gear selection is recommended. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26for more information.

To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.The message reappears every 10 minutes until thiscondition changes. If you do not press the RESETbutton, the message remains on the display untilthe condition changes.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if a turnsignal is left on for three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

To acknowledge this message, press the RESETbutton.

UNLATCH HEADER TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds if you tryto lower the convertible top without first unlockingthe top. Move the latch handle to unlock the convertibletop. See Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-63 orConvertible Top (Power) on page 2-70.

3-70

Other MessagesHere are more messages that you can receive on yourDriver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge amessage and read another message that may havecome on at the same time, press the RESET button.

• ACCESSORY MODE ON

• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-38.

• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-38.

• CHECK WASHER FLUID

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-41.

• CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (XXX km/h)

See Cruise Control on page 3-11.

• DRIVER DOOR AJAR

• FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT XX MINUTES

See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operation onpage 2-5.

• FOB BATTERY LOW

See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless AccessSystem Operation on page 2-5.

• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)

• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF, if your vehicle has thisfeature

• INTRUSION SENSOR ON, if your vehicle has thisfeature

• KNOWN FOB


• MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED

See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” underKeyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.

• OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN


• PASSENGER DOOR AJAR

• READY FOR FOB #X


• TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)

• TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)

• UPSHIFT NOW

See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-31.

3-71

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationMany features on your vehicle can be personalized.This means that the operation of these features can beset to operate differently depending on who is drivingthe vehicle. See “Personal Options” later in this sectionfor the features that you can personalize.

The personalization settings for other features areautomatically updated and saved as the driver adjuststhem. These include the following settings and presets:

• The radio presets, tone, volume, fade, balance,equalization (EQ) settings and source (radio or CD)

• The last climate control setting

• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position and dimminglevel, if your vehicle has this feature

• The instrument panel cluster dimming level and lastselected DIC display

Separate personalization settings are saved fortwo different drivers. One of the keyless accesstransmitters is assigned to driver 1. The other isassigned to driver 2. The back of the keyless accesstransmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to correspond toeach driver.

The current driver’s preferences are recalled when oneof the following occurs:

• The lock or unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter, labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.

• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located onthe driver’s door is pressed. See Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-4 for moreinformation.

• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected uponopening the driver’s door.

If more than one valid keyless access transmitter isdetected upon opening the driver’s door, the driverpreferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.

If a keyless access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2is used, the personalization system will not recognizethe transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) willnot display a current driver number and the featuresthat are normally programmed through the DIC will beset to the default states. Also, if the OPTION buttonis pressed, the DIC does not display the menus used toset personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONSUNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.

3-72

Entering the Personal Options MenuTo enter the personal options menu, use thefollowing steps:

1. If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, turnthe vehicle on with the shift lever in PARK (P).If you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn thevehicle on with the parking brake set.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the OPTION button and you will enter thePERSONAL OPTIONS menu.The DIC will display the current drivernumber (1 or 2) for a few seconds and then willdisplay instructions on which buttons to use forsetting the personalizations. The RESET button isused to select a setting for a particular feature. TheOPTION button is used to move to the next feature.

3. Press the OPTION button while the instructionscreen is displayed to enter the first personalizationmenu item.

4. Once you have cycled through all of the personaloptions, pressing the OPTION button a final timeexits the personal options menu. In addition, ifno button is pressed within 45 seconds, the DICwill exit the personal options menu.

Personal OptionsThe following options are available for programming:

Display Units: This option allows you to choosethe measurement units.

Press the OPTION button until DISPLAY UNITS appearson the display, then press the RESET button to scrollthrough the following modes:

• ENGLISH (default)

• METRIC

If you choose ENGLISH, all information will be displayedin English units.

If you choose METRIC, all information will be displayedin metric units.

When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.

Auto Memory Recall (Automatic Transmissiononly): If your automatic transmission vehicle has thememory package, you may have this option. This optionallows the driver’s seat, the telescopic steering column,if your vehicle has this feature, and the outside rearviewmirrors to automatically move to the current driver’s setposition when the engine starts.

3-73

Press the OPTION button until AUTO MEMORY RECALLappears on the display, then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:

• YES

• NO (default)

If you choose YES, the driver’s seat, the outsiderearview mirrors and the telescopic steering column,if your vehicle has this feature, positions are recalledwhen you turn the ignition on.

If you choose NO, this option will turn off.


Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle has the memorypackage, you may have this option. This option allowsthe driver’s seat and telescopic steering column, ifyour vehicle has this feature, to automatically moveto the current driver’s exit position when one ofthe following occurs:

• The vehicle is turned off or in Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) or accessory mode and the driver’sdoor is opened.

• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlockbutton on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.

In order for the Auto Exit Recall feature to work on anautomatic transmission vehicle, the vehicle must bein PARK (P). On a manual transmission vehicle,the parking brake must be set.

Press the OPTION button until AUTO EXIT RECALLappears on the display, then press the RESET buttonto scroll through the following modes:

• YES

• NO (default)

If you choose YES, when you turn the ignition off andopen the driver’s door or press the unlock button on thekeyless access transmitter, the seat and the telescopicsteering wheel, if your vehicle has this feature, will returnto their stored exit positions for an easy exit or aneasy entrance when returning to the vehicle.

The seat and steering wheel will only return to thestored driving position if you press the appropriatememory button or activate the auto memory recallfeature.



3-74

Approach Lights: This option briefly turns on theparking lamps, the front fog lamps and the back-uplamps during low light periods when the keyless accesstransmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.

Press the OPTION button until APPROACH LIGHTSappears on the display, then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:

• OFF

• ON (default)

If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.

If you choose ON, the parking lamps, the front foglamps, and the back-up lamps will come on for20 seconds during low light periods when all of thefollowing occurs:

• You press the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.

• Both of the doors are closed.

• The vehicle is off or in RAP.

The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until a door isopened, the lock button on the keyless access transmitteris pressed or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.

See Keyless Access System on page 2-4 for moreinformation.


Twilight Delay: This option allows you to set the amountof time you want the parking lamps and front fog lamps toremain on after you exit the vehicle. This will occur whenthe vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on dueto the automatic headlamp system. The parking lampsand front fog lamps will remain on until the driver selectedtime expires, the exterior lamp control is activated or thevehicle is no longer off or in RAP.

Press the OPTION button until TWILIGHT DELAYappears on the display, then press the RESET buttonto scroll through the following modes:

• OFF

• 15 S

• 30 S (default)

• 90 S


If you choose 15 S, the twilight delay time will be set to15 seconds.



3-75

When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance to thenext personal option.

Flash at Unlock: This option activates the front andrear turn signals for two short flashes when the unlockor hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter ispressed. This will only occur when the vehicle is off.

Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT UNLOCKappears on the display, then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:

• YES (default)

• NO

If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signalswill flash twice when you press the unlock button or thehatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter.



Flash at Lock: This option activates the front and rearturn signals for one long flash when the lock buttonon the keyless access transmitter is pressed. This willonly occur when the vehicle is off. If the lock buttonon the keyless access transmitter is pressed againwithin five seconds, the horn will sound regardlessof which setting you have selected.

Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT LOCKappears on the display, then press the RESET buttonto scroll through the following modes:

• YES (default)

• NO

If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals willflash once when you press the lock button on thekeyless access transmitter.



3-76

FOB Reminder: This option chirps the horn three timeswhen the driver’s door is closed and there is a keylessaccess transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle.This will only occur when the vehicle is off.

Press the OPTION button until FOB REMINDER appearson the display, then press the RESET button to scrollthrough the following modes:

• YES

• NO (default)

If you choose YES, the horn will chirp three times whena keyless access transmitter is inside of the vehiclewhile the ignition is turned off and the driver’s dooris closed.



Passive Door Locking: This option allows you toselect whether the doors automatically lock duringnormal vehicle exit. When the ignition is turned off andall doors become closed, the vehicle will determinehow many keyless access transmitters remain inthe vehicle interior. If at least one keyless accesstransmitter has been removed from the interior ofthe vehicle, the doors will lock after eight seconds.

For example, if there are two keyless accesstransmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, theother will be locked in. The keyless access transmitterlocked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicleor unlock the doors, if needed. A person approachingthe outside of the locked vehicle without an authorizedkeyless access transmitter, however, will not be ableto open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.

You may temporarily disable the passive doorlocking feature by pressing the door unlock switch forthree seconds on an open door. Passive door locking willthen remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed oruntil the power mode transitions from the off power mode.

Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOORLOCKING appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the following modes:

• OFF (default)

• SILENT

• HORN


If you choose SILENT, the doors will automatically lockeight seconds after you turn the ignition off, removea keyless access transmitter from the interior ofthe vehicle, and close both doors.

3-77

If you choose HORN, the doors will automatically lockand the horn will chirp eight seconds after you turnthe ignition off, remove a keyless access transmitterfrom the interior of the vehicle, and close both doors.

If you are parking in a quiet area and do not wantthe horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lockbutton on the keyless access transmitter immediatelyafter removing it from the interior and closing the doors.This will lock the doors and cancel the passive lockingfor this ignition cycle.

When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advanceto the next personal option.

Passive Door Unlock: This option allows you toselect which doors will automatically unlock when youapproach and open the driver’s door with the keylessaccess transmitter. See Door Locks on page 2-10for more information.

Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOORUNLOCK appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the following modes:

• DRIVER (default)

• BOTH

If you choose DRIVER, only the driver’s door willautomatically unlock when you approach and openthe driver’s door with the keyless access transmitter.

If you choose BOTH, both doors will automaticallyunlock when you approach and open the driver’s doorwith the keyless access transmitter.

Auto Unlock: This option allows you to select whetherthe driver’s door, both doors or neither door automaticallyunlocks when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P) forautomatic transmission vehicles or when the ignition isturned off or is in RAP for manual transmission vehicles.

Press the OPTION button until AUTO UNLOCK appearson the display, then press the RESET button to scrollthrough the following modes:

• OFF

• DRIVER

• BOTH (default)


If you choose DRIVER, on automatic transmissionvehicles, the driver’s door will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved into PARK (P). On manualtransmission vehicles, the driver’s door will automaticallyunlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.

If you choose BOTH, on automatic transmissionvehicles, both doors will automatically unlock whenthe shift lever is moved into PARK (P). On manualtransmission vehicles, both doors will automaticallyunlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.

3-78


Language: This option allows you to select thelanguage the DIC, the Head-Up Display (HUD), if yourvehicle has this feature, and the radio uses to displaymessages. Each language mode will be displayed in itsown language. For example, English will be displayedas ENGLISH, Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. If your vehiclehas the navigation system, you will not have theJapanese language mode.

Press the OPTION button until LANGUAGE appearson the display, then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:

• ENGLISH (default)

• DEUTSCH (German)

• FRANCAIS (French)

• ITALIANO (Italian)

• ESPANOL (Spanish)

If you choose a language that you do not understand,press the OPTION and RESET buttons for five seconds.The DIC will begin displaying all of the various languagesone by one for as long as the buttons are pressed. Whenthe desired language is displayed, release the buttonsand the DIC will set to this language.


Personalize Name: This option allows you to typein a name or greeting that will appear on the DICdisplay whenever the corresponding keyless accesstransmitter (1 or 2) is used or one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door is pressed.

Press the OPTION button until PERSONALIZE NAMEappears on the display, then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:

• YES

• NO (default)

If you choose YES, you can type in a name that willappear on the DIC display.

To program a name, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and selectthe driver number (1 or 2) that you would liketo program by following the instructions listedpreviously under “Entering the PersonalOptions Menu”.

2. Press the OPTION button until the PERSONALIZENAME option appears on the display.

3. Select YES under PERSONALIZE NAME bypressing the RESET button.

3-79

4. Press the OPTION button and a cursor will displaywhere you can insert a letter.

5. Press the OPTION button again until the letter youwant is displayed. To scroll through the letters fasterand without a beeping noise, keep the OPTIONSbutton depressed. There are alpha/numericcharacters and a blank space available.

6. Then press the RESET button to select the letter ofyour choice and proceed on to the next space tothe right.If you make a mistake and would like to clear orreplace a letter, perform the following steps:

6.1. Press the RESET button to reach the letteryou would like to change.

6.2. Press the OPTION button to scroll throughthe letter choices.

6.3. Press the RESET button to select the letterand proceed on to the next space to the right.

7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the name or greetingyou want is complete. After the name or greetingis complete, keep pressing the RESET buttonuntil the display turns blank and exits out of thisoption. You can program up to 20 characters.


If a customized name or greeting is not programmed,the DIC display will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 tocorrespond with either the number on the back of thekeyless access transmitter (1 or 2) that is being usedor to the memory button (1 or 2) that is pressed.

PERSONALIZE NAME is the last option available toprogram in the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Pressingthe OPTION button after this setting will exit youfrom the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. The last itemyou were in prior to entering PERSONAL OPTIONSwill then display on the DIC.

3-80

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and then readthe pages following to familiarize yourself with itsfeatures.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash and youor others can be injured or killed. Always keepyour eyes on the road and your mind on thedrive — avoid engaging in extended searchingwhile driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, makesure that it can be added by checking with yourdealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules coveringmobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipmentcan be added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or othersystems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’ssystems may interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-23 for moreinformation.

3-81

Setting the TimeWith the ignition on and the radio off, press the H or theM button to enter clock mode. Press and hold H untilthe correct hour appears on the display. Press andhold M until the correct minute appears on the display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press either the H or the M button to enterthe clock mode. Press the tune knob to select betweenthe 12 or 24 hour display format. The clock modeautomatically times out with the changed displayformat set as the current default setting.

Radio(s)

Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.

An indicator light on the upper left side of the radioflashes when the ignition is off, to indicate the theftdeterrent feature is set. For more information, seeTheft-Deterrent Feature on page 3-101.

Your vehicle has seven Bose® amplified speakers.See your dealer/retailer for details.

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD similar

3-82

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming.

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies.

• Display messages from radio stations.

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and works only when the informationis available. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters display. RDS stations can alsoprovide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

Playing the Radio

Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

4 (Information): For RDS, press to change whatdisplay while using RDS. The display options are stationname, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name ofthe program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press while in XM™ mode toretrieve four different categories of information relatedto the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press until yousee the desired display, then hold for two seconds.The radio produces one beep and the selected displayis now the default.

AUTO n (Automatic Volume): Automatic volumeautomatically adjusts the audio system to make upfor road and wind noise as you drive, by increasingthe volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum), AUTO VOLUMEMED (medium), or AUTO VOLUME MAX (maximum).

3-83

Each higher setting provides more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off,press this until AUTO VOLUME OFF displays.

If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, it includesBose® AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts theaudio system to compensate for background noise, sothat the music always sounds the same at the set volumelevel. This feature is most effective at lower radio volumesettings where background noise can affect how well youhear the music being played. At higher volume settings,where the music is much louder than the backgroundnoise, there could be little or no adjustments byAudioPilot®.

To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to the desiredlevel. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressing the automaticvolume button until AVOL ON displays. As the vehiclegoes faster, the background noise increases. AudioPilot®

adjusts the audio system’s sound level to overcomebackground noise. To turn AudioPilot® off, press theautomatic volume button until AVOL OFF displays.For additional information on AudioPilot®, visitwww.bose.com/audiopilot.

MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turnthe sound on.

This button is not available on the Radio withSix-Disc CD.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch between AM, XM1 or XM2(if equipped), FM1, or FM2. The display showsthe selection.

O / e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

t SEEK u: Press the arrows to go to the previousor to the next station and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN displays.The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes on to the next station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow forfour seconds until PRESET SCAN displays. The radiogoes to the next preset station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press either arrowagain or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

3-84

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six AM, six XM1 and six XM2(if equipped), six FM1, and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, XM1 or XM2(if equipped), FM1, or FM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the station thatwas set, returns and the equalization that wasselected is stored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

O / e (Bass/Treble): Press to select BASS orTREBLE. Turn to increase or to decrease the tone.If a station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,press and hold when the tone control is on the display.The level changes to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold when no tone or speaker controlis displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED displays.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press toselect customized equalization settings designed forclassical, pop, rock, jazz, talk, and country. SelectingCUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns the EQto the manual bass and treble settings.

The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for eachpreset and source.

If the radio has the Bose® audio system, the equalizationsettings are EQ1 through EQ6 and CUSTOM.

3-85

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press untilBALANCE displays. Turn to move the sound toward theright or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press until FADE displays. Turn to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,press and hold when the speaker control is on thedisplay. The level changes to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold when no tone or speaker controlis displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED displays.

Finding a Category Station(RDS and XM™ (if equipped))To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT (category) button. The last selectedcategory displays.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category displays, press eitherSEEK arrow to go to a category’s station. SEEKINGCATEGORY displays.

4. To go to another station within that category, pressthe CAT button to display the category, then presseither SEEK arrow to go to another station.

If both category and traffic are on, the radio searchesfor stations with the selected category and trafficannouncements.

If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONEdisplays and the radio returns to the last station tuned.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a category byperforming the following:

1. Press the CAT button. The last selected categorydisplays.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow until a beep sounds andSCAN CATEGORY displays. The radio beginsscanning the stations in the category.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.

If both category and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radioscans for stations with the selected category and trafficannouncements.

3-86

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! displays. The announcement isheard, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement.Alert announcements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

4 (Information): If the current station has a message,INFO (information) displays. Press to see the message.The message can display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scroll throughthe message, press and release this button. A new groupof words display after every press of the button. Once thecomplete message has displayed, INFO disappears fromthe display until another new message is received. Thelast message can be displayed by pressing this button.The last message until a new message is received or theradio is tuned to a different station.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO displays.

TRAF (Traffic): If TA (traffic) displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements. When atraffic announcement is broadcast on this station,you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a stationthat does. When a station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radio stops seekingand TA displays. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn offthe traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if thelast tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.

3-87

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CAL ERR displays, it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicle andmust be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ RadioOnline for when you are not in your vehicle. A servicefee is required to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM™ Radio MessagesWith XM™ Satellite Radio Service, the radio can displayscreen messages pertaining to the XM™ radio service,software and hardware. See XM Radio Messageson page 3-100 later in this section for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playingif the radio is on, or if the radio is off and the vehicleis running or in accessory mode.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smallerCDs are loaded in the same manner.

3-88

Care of Your CDsIf playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)in their original cases or other protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, theCD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch thebottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damagethe surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint freecloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerDo not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computerand a description label is needed, try labeling the top ofthe recorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than oneCD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CDplayer could be damaged. While using the CD player,use only CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and theloading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

3-89

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the M button.

2. When INSERT CD # displays, load a CD andinsert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the M button for two seconds.

Two beeps sound and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.

2. When INSERT CD # displays, load a CD andinsert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD # todisplay, then load the next CD. The CD player takesup to six CDs.

To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,press the M button to cancel the loading function.The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number foreach CD displays.

3-90

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To play aspecific CD press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

X (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold for two seconds.A beep sounds and EJECT ALL displays.

2. When REMOVE DISC displays, the CD ejects andcan be removed.

To stop ejecting the CDs, press the M orthe X button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD isautomatically pulled back into the player. If the CDis pushed back into the player, before the 25 secondtime period is complete, the player senses an error andtries to eject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the X button to eject a CDafter you have tried to push it in manually. The player’s25-second eject timer resets at each press of eject,causing the player not to eject the CD until the25-second time period has elapsed.

O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previoustrack.

{ (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse within thecurrent track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and hold to fast forwardthrough the current track.

RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential, order. RANDOM DISC PLAYdisplays.

RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):Press to hear the tracks in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all of the loaded CDs.

3-91

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening toin random order, press and release until RANDOMDISC PLAY displays. Once all tracks on this dischave played, RANDOM DISC PLAY will repeat.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded inrandom order, press and release until RANDOM ALLDISCS displays.

To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF displays.

RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track over again.REPEAT displays.

RPT (Repeat) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Pressto hear a track or an entire CD over again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release until REPEATdisplays.

• To repeat an entire CD, press and release untilREPEAT ONE DISC displays.

To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF displays.

X (Eject): Press to eject the CD. EJECT can beactivated with either the ignition or radio off.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current track if more than eight seconds haveplayed. Press the right arrow to go to the start of thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold eitherarrow for more than two seconds until SCAN displays anda beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays for10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press eitherarrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds until CD SCAN displays and abeep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD. Press either arrowagain, to stop scanning.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press toselect the equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization is stored when a CD is played.For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”listed previously in this section.

3-92

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD isplaying. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radiofor future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listeningto the radio. CD displays when a CD is in the player.If your system has a remote playback device, pressingthis button a second time allows the remote deviceto play.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscVehicles with the MP3 feature has the capability ofplaying an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 3-96 later in this section.

Using R (Song List) Mode(Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD.

2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not display. If S-LIST displays,press the R (song list) button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the right SEEK arrow orturn the O / e (tune) knob to locate the track tobe saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the R button to save thetrack into memory. When song list is pressed,one beep sounds. ADDED SONG displays.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

SONGLIST FULL displays if you try to save morethan 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the R button. The recordedtracks begins to play in the order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.Seeking past the last saved track returns to the firstsaved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LISTdisplays.

3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the O / e knobto select the desired track to be deleted.

3-93

4. Press and hold the R button for two seconds.Release the button when SONG REMOVEDdisplays.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracksare moved up the list. When another track is added tothe song list, the track is added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LISTdisplays.

3. Press and hold this button for more than fourseconds. One beep sounds and SONGLIST EMPTYdisplays indicating the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to thesong list again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the R button. One beepsounds and S-LIST is removed from the display.

CD Messages

CHECK CD OR CD READ ERROR: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provideit to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

3-94

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jack locatedon the right side of the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, etc.can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for useas another source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Drivingon page 4-2.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, the radio displays AUXINPUT DEVICE and begins playing audio fromthat device.

Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the volumeof the portable player. Additional volume adjustmentsmight need to be made from the portable device.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portableaudio device is playing. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you might want to stop it orturn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD whilea portable audio device is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. If a portable audio player isconnected, AUX INPUT DEVICE displays. If a portableaudio player is not connected, AUX INPUT DEVICEdoes not display.

3-95

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,other file extensions might not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and albumare available for display by the radio when recordedusing ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to findsongs while driving. Organize songs by albums usingone folder for each album. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better toburn the disc all at once.

• Do not use CD-RW discs.

• Do not use colored discs.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.Long file names, folder names, or playlist namescould use more disc memory space than necessary.To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3 CD that wasrecorded using no file folders can also be played. Thesystem can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order tokeep down the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback. If a CDcontains more than the maximum of 50 folders,50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the playerlets you access and navigate up to the maximum,but all items over the maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directory isdisplayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

3-96

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the filestructure that contains only folders/subfolders and nocompressed files directly beneath them, the playeradvances to the next folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files. The empty folderdoes not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, the filesare located under the root folder. The next and previousfolder functions will not function on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists and compressedaudio files, but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. The folder down and the folder up buttonssearches playlists (Px) first and then goes to theroot folder. When the radio displays the name ofthe folder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlistand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then playbegins from the first track under the root directory.When all tracks from the root directory have played,play continues from files according to their numericallisting. After playing the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the first folder orroot directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen as the default display.See the information button later in this section formore information. The new track name displays.

3-97

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the song name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. Parts of words on the last page oftext and the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ softwarecan be accessed, however, they cannot be editedusing the radio. These playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing and the CD symbol displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD-R starts to play where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

O / e (Tune): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise togo to the next or previous track.

{ (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track inthe previous folder. Press and hold to reverse throughthe current track.

| (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track inthe next folder. Press and hold to fast forward thecurrent track.

RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential order, on one CD, one folder,or all of the loaded CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD in random order,press and release until RANDOM DISC PLAYdisplays.

• To play the tracks in the folder in random order,press and release until RANDOM FOLDERdisplays.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and release until RANDOMALL DISCS displays.

To turn off random play, press and release the RDMbutton until RANDOM OFF displays.

3-98

RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track, CD, or a folderover again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release until REPEATdisplays.

• To repeat a CD, press and release until REPEATONE DISC displays.

• To repeat a folder, press and release until REPEATFOLDER displays.

To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPTbutton until REPEAT OFF displays.

MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turnthe sound on.

This button is not available on the Radio withSix-Disc CD.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than eight seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through the CD.

4 (Information): Press to display the artist name andalbum contained in the ID3 tag.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD isplaying. The inactive CD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listeningto the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD isloaded.

Y (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject can activatedwith either the ignition or radio off.

3-99

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is beingupdated, and no action is required. This processshould take no longer than 30 seconds.

No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, butthe vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™signal. When you move into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action is needed.This message should disappear shortly.

CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.Tune to another channel.

CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to another station. If this stationwas one of the presets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Info: No artist, song title, category, or textinformation is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info: No text or informational messages areavailable at this time on this channel. The system isworking properly.

Not Found: There are no channels available for theselected category. The system is working properly.

XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle couldhave previously been in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped betweenvehicles. If this message is received after havingyour vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternateswith the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned tochannel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consultwith your dealer/retailer.

Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear withina short period of time, your receiver could have a fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer. If this messagedoes not clear within a short period of time, your receivercould have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

3-100

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in features intendedto minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,no matter how advanced, can never replace yourown judgment. See the Navigation System manual forsome tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature works automaticallyby learning a portion of the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

Your radio has a blinking indicator light located on theupper left side of the radio. The indicator light is used toshow that the theft-deterrent feature mode is set. Theblinking indicator light will only flash when the ignition isin the off position.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted atthe steering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrowto go to the next or to the previous radio station and staythere. The radio only seeks stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either the down orup arrow for two seconds until SCAN displays anda beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays fora few seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither the down or up arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan presets, press and hold either the down or uparrow for four seconds until PRESET SCAN displaysand a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next station.

3-101

Press either the down or up arrow again to stopscanning.

When a CD is playing, press the down or up arrow togo to the next or to the previous track.

To scan the current CD, press and hold either the downor up arrow for more than two seconds. The CD goesto the next track, plays the first 10 seconds, then goesto the next track. Press either the down or up arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherthe down or up arrow for more than four seconds.The CD goes to the next CD, plays the first 10 secondsof each track, then goes to the next CD. Press eitherthe down or up arrow again to stop scanning.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio only seeks preset stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can cause stationfrequencies to interfere with each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduces these levels during thenight. Static can also occur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radio reception. When thishappens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reachonly about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals, causing the soundto fade in and out.

3-102

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause the loss of XM™signal for a period of time. The radio may display NOSIGNAL to indicate interference.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with yourvehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when makingor receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on. This interference causesan increased level of static while listening to the radio.If static is received while listening to the radio, unplugthe cellular phone and turn it off.

Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuning system.It optimizes the AM and FM signals relative to thevehicle’s position and radio station source.No maintenance or adjustments are needed.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemIf your vehicle has the XM™ Satellite Radio Service,it will have an XM™ Satellite Radio antenna. This typeof antenna is located on the roof or on the trunk lidof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.

3-103

✍ NOTES

3-104

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6Active Handling System ...................................4-7Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-9Selective Ride Control ...................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-11Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-13

Racing or Other Competitive Driving ................4-15Driving at Night ............................................4-16Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-18Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-18Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-18Winter Driving ..............................................4-19If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .............................................4-23Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-24Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-24

Towing ..........................................................4-29Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-29Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-29Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-29

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-9.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance betweenyou and the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisionsresulting in injury or possible death. Thesesimple defensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,and judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Do not drink and drive or ridewith a driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

4-2

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control your vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. Attimes, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires androad can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of yourvehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6 and Active Handling System on page 4-7.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectyour vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

4-3

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-39.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bringup your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it iswet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. The brakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,the pedal could get harder to push down. If theengine stops, you will still have some power brakeassist. But you will use it when you brake. Once thepower assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Under certain weather or operating conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noise mightbe heard with your vehicle’s performance brakingsystem. This brake system is designed for superior faderesistance and consistent operation using highperformance brake pads. Brake noise is normal anddoes not affect system performance.


4-4

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to drive away,ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentarymotor or clicking noise while this test is going on, andyou might even notice that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem withABS, this warning light willstay on. See AntilockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-40.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to make themost of available tire and road conditions. This canhelp you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time you need toget your foot up to the brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle infront of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes ifthat vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work for you. You might heara motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedalmove a little during a stop, but this is normal.

4-5

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. Inmany emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCSthat limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the rear wheels are spinning too much or arebeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem works the rear brakes and reduces engine power(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) tolimit wheel spin.

The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) when the TCSsystem is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55. You may feel or hear thesystem working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS systembegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditions allow youto safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruisecontrol. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.

The SERVICE TRACTIONSYSTEM message andthe TCS warning light willcome on to let youknow if there is a problemwith your TCS system.See DIC Warningsand Messages onpage 3-55.

When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMmessage are on, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.

The TCS system automatically comes on whenever youstart your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, you should always leave thesystem on. But you can turn the TCS system off ifyou ever need to.

4-6

To turn the system off,press the button locatedon the console.

You can turn the system on or off at any time bypressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. The DIC willdisplay the appropriate message when you pushthe button.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible tolose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rearwheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possibleto cause damage to the transmission. Do notattempt to shift when the rear wheels do not havetraction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle isnot covered. See your warranty book for additionalinformation.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectyour vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Active Handling SystemThe Active Handling System is a computer controlledsystem that helps the driver maintain directional controlof the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This isaccomplished by selectively applying any one of thevehicle’s brakes.

When you first start your vehicle during cold winterweather and begin to drive away, the message ACTIVEHANDLING WARMING UP may be displayed in theDIC. This is normal. You can acknowledge this messageby pressing the RESET button. The Active HandlingSystem performance is affected until the message,ACTIVE HANDLING READY, is displayed in the DIC.

The ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING message maybe displayed in the DIC and the instrument panelcluster light will be on after exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h)for 10 seconds. The Active Handling System is offuntil the ACTIVE HANDLING READY messageis displayed. This could take up to 15 minutes.

The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on whenthe system is operating. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-55 for more information. You mayalso feel or hear the system working. This is normal.

4-7

The SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING SYSTEMmessage will be displayed,the instrument clusterlight will come on, and achime will sound to let youknow if there is aproblem with the system.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-55 formore information.

When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLINGSYSTEM message are on, the system is notoperational. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The Active Handling System comes on automaticallywhenever you start your vehicle. To help maintaindirectional control of the vehicle, you should alwaysleave the system on. You can turn the system off if youever need to. If you turn the Active Handling Systemoff, the Traction Control System will also be turned off.Adjust your driving accordingly.

To turn the system off,press the ACTIVEHANDLING button on theconsole for five seconds.You can turn thesystem on at any time bypressing the button.The DIC will display theappropriate message whenyou push the button.

If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a flattire and the Driver Information Center (DIC) displaysTIRE FLAT, or if the TPM system is malfunctioning andthe DIC displays SERVICE TIRE MONITOR, theActive Handling System will be affected as follows:

• The Active Handling System cannot be turned off bythe driver.

• If the Active Handling System is off, it will be turnedon automatically.

• Competitive Driving Mode is unavailable.

• The Active Handling System will feel different inaiding and maintaining directional control.

4-8

Competitive Driving ModeThe driver can select this optional handling mode bypressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the consoletwo times within a five second time period.COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE will be displayed in theDIC. Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to havefull control of the rear wheels while the Active HandlingSystem helps maintain directional control of the vehicleby selective brake application. This involves lessintervention than with both the Active Handling Systemand Traction Control Systems on. The instrument clusterlight will not be on. The Traction Control System will notbe operating. Adjust your driving accordingly.

When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button again,or press the Acc. button, the Active Handling andTraction Control Systems will be on. The TRACTIONSYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message will bedisplayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime will beheard.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible tolose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rearwheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possibleto cause damage to the transmission. Do notattempt to shift when the rear wheels do not havetraction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle isnot covered. See your warranty book for additionalinformation.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour limited-slip rear axle can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works likea standard axle most of the time, but when one ofthe rear wheels has no traction and the other does, thisfeature will allow the wheel with traction to move thevehicle.

4-9

Selective Ride ControlYou may have a ride control system on your vehiclecalled Magnetic Selective Ride Control. The systemprovides the following performance benefits:

• Reduced Impact Harshness

• Improved Road Isolation

• Improved High-Speed Stability

• Improved Handling Response

• Better Control of Body Ride Motions

This knob is located on thecenter console. Turn it toselect the suspensionof your choice.

TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving. Thissetting provides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand more control. This setting providesmore “feel”, or response to the road conditions.

You can select a setting at any time. Based on roadconditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,the system automatically adjusts to provide the bestride and handling. Select a new setting whenever drivingconditions change.

Three Driver Information Center (DIC) messages(SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVEand MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) displaywhen a malfunction occurs with the Selective RideControl system. Refer to DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for more information.

4-10

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable AssistSteeringYour vehicle has a steering system that continuouslyadjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehiclespeeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solidfeel at highway speeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to dotheir work where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-6.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the frontwheels are straight ahead.

4-11

Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effective thanbraking. For example, you come over a hill and find atruck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the timefor evasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4. Itis better to remove as much speed as you can from apossible collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,we suggest the following tips:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass. Ifin doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-13

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels arenot rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If your traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is also best handledby easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try yourbest to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilyour vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-14

Racing or Other Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehicle forracing or other competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or othercompetitive driving, the engine may use moreoil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil on page 5-17.

Z06 Only: Be sure to check the oil level often duringracing or other competitive driving and keep thelevel at or near the upper mark that shows theproper operating range on the engine oil dipstick.

Except Z06: Be sure to check the oil level oftenduring racing or other competitive driving and keepthe level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the uppermark that shows the proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. After the competitive driving,remove excess oil so that the level on the dipstick isnot above the upper mark that shows the properoperating range.

Vehicles with the Z51 performance package havegreaseable outer ends on both of the rear toe-links.Under normal use, lubrication should be performed asdescribed in the maintenance schedule. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 and Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11. If you use the vehicle forracing, lubrication should be performed at the end ofeach racing day. See your dealer/retailer for lubricationand make sure any needed repairs are made atonce. Proper procedures for performing these servicescan be found in the service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

4-15

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day drivingbecause some drivers are likely to be impaired — byalcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or byfatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because your headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,as we get older, these differences increase. A50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

4-16

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. Driving through flowing water couldcause your vehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsand be very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-58.

4-17

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Haveup-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

4-18

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let the engine assist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine running and yourvehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-58.

4-19

Driving On Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tires meet theroad probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation.You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it can offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Tryto avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

Traction control improves your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even though your vehiclehas a traction control system, slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,you might want to turn the traction control systemoff, such as when driving through deep snow and loosegravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lowerspeeds. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6. The Active Handling System might alsoactivate. See Active Handling System on page 4-7.

4-20

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Even though you have ABS, beginstopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5.

• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine untilyou hit a spot that is covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches can appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such asaround clumps of trees, behind buildings, or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while youare actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

4-21

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with the headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-22

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free yourvehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-24.

If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severefor the traction system to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-79.

4-23

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. Turn the tractioncontrol system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-6. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. For a manual transmission, shiftslowly between either FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)and REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop beforeshifting into gear. To prevent transmission wear,wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions, you will cause arocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that doesnot get your vehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to betowed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certificationlabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

4-24

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, youwill find the label attached below the doorlatch. This label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).

For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 5-58 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-66.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification Label” later in thissection.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

Label Example

4-25

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intendedto tow a trailer.

Item Description Total

AVehicle CapacityWeight forExample 1 =

400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight @ 150 lbs(68 kg) x 1 =

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

4-26



400 lbs (181 kg)


300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)



400 lbs (181 kg)


400 lbs (181 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-27

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

Do not load your vehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry. See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.

4-28

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.

Recreational Vehicle TowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehiclemay cause damage because of reduced groundclearance. Always put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.

Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to betowed with any of its wheels on the ground. If yourvehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle”earlier in this section.

Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

4-29

✍ NOTES

4-30

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ......................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12Hood Release ..............................................5-13Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14Engine Oil ...................................................5-17Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-23Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-25Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-27Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-27Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-27Engine Coolant .............................................5-28Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-31

Engine Overheating .......................................5-31Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................5-33Cooling System ............................................5-34Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-39Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-41Brakes ........................................................5-42Battery ........................................................5-45Jump Starting ...............................................5-46

Rear Axle .......................................................5-51Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-51Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-52Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..........................................5-53Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-54Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-55

Windshield Replacement .................................5-55Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-55Tires ..............................................................5-58

Winter Tires .................................................5-59Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-60Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-62Run-Flat Tires ..............................................5-64

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-66High-Speed Operation ...................................5-67Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-68Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-69Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-71When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-72Buying New Tires .........................................5-73Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-74Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-75Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-76Wheel Replacement ......................................5-76Tire Chains ..................................................5-79Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................5-80If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-84

Appearance Care ............................................5-85Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-85Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-86Coated Moldings ...........................................5-87Leather .......................................................5-87Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ..................................................5-88Cargo Cover and Convenience Net .................5-88Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-89

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-89Finish Care ..................................................5-89Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-90Removable Roof Panel ..................................5-91Convertible Top ............................................5-91Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ..................................................5-92Tires ...........................................................5-92Finish Damage .............................................5-93Underbody Maintenance ................................5-93Fiberglass Springs (Composite Springs) ...........5-93Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-93Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-94

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-95Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-95Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-95

Electrical System ............................................5-95Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-95Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-96Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-96Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-96Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-96Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-96Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-100

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added toyour vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems likeantilock brakes, traction control and stability control.Some of these accessories could even causemalfunction or damage not covered by warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GMdealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-58.

5-3

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless entry transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts,and tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work, youshould use the proper service manual. It tells you muchmore about how to service your vehicle than thismanual can. To order the proper service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

5-4

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-57.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economy and windshieldwasher performance. Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)shows the code letter or number that identifies yourvehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) on page 5-95.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code W),use premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regularunleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, butyour vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,and you might notice a slight audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If theoctane is less than 87, you might notice a heavyknocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher andyou hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 7.0L V8 engine (VIN Code E),use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 91 or higher. For best performance, usepremium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane ratingof 93. In an emergency, you can use regular unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher. If87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any aggressivedriving maneuvers such as wide open throttleapplications. You might also hear audible spark knockduring acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel assoon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher andyou hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

5-5

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolines containing MMT. SeeAdditives on page 5-6 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See the underhoodemission control label. If this fuel is not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, yourvehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission control systemperformance might be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might faila smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-43. If this occurs, return to your authorizeddealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined thatthe condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairsmight not be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have to add anything to thefuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To helpkeep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or ifyour vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectorsor valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct and prevent mostdeposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

5-6

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under yourwarranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of theemission control system could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.Do not leave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

5-8

The fuel door releasebutton is located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.Push the button to releasethe fuel door.

There is also a manualfuel door release tab. It islocated against theupper trim in the rearcompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.Pull the tab to releasethe fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.

5-9

While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below thefuel fill opening.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could be badlyburned.This spray can happen if your tank isnearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-89.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-43.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for more information.

5-10

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage your fuel tank andemissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-43.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the fuel vapor. Youcan be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

5-11

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-12

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood releaselever with this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehiclebelow the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.

2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rearedge of the hood, near the windshield.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then, just pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

5-13

Engine Compartment OverviewIf your vehicle has the 6.2L LS3 V8 engine and you are facing the front, when you open the hood, here is what youwill see:

5-14

A. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-27.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-41.

C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-42.

D. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filters. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-25.

F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-39.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 5-100.

J. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-31.

K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.

5-15

If your vehicle has the 7.0L LS7 V8 engine and you are facing the driver’s side of the vehicle, when you open thehood, here is what you will see:

5-16

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-25.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-39.

C. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 5-100.

D. Remote Positive Terminal (Out of View). See Batteryon page 5-45.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See “Changing EngineOil and Filter (Z06 Only)” Engine Oil on page 5-17.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 5-17.

H. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28.

I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-41.

J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-42.

K. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir. See HydraulicClutch on page 5-27.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil (Except Z06)If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, check the engineoil level right away. For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-49. You shouldcheck the engine oil level regularly; this is an addedreminder.

It is a good idea to check the engine oil level every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be on levelground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a lint-freepaper towel or a cloth, then push it back in allthe way.

3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip downand read the level on the cross-hatched area. Oillevels that fall in the cross-hatched area are normal.

4. Push the dipstick back in all the way.

5-17

When to Add Engine Oil (Except Z06)

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip ofthe dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 5-103.

See Racing or Other Competitive Driving on page 4-15for additional information on engine oil.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

5-18

Checking Engine Oil (Z06 Only)

A. Engine Oil DipstickB. Engine Oil Fill Cap

It is a good idea to check the engine oil level every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be on levelground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. Thedipstick is located on the dry sump engine oil tank. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for thelocation of the dry sump engine oil tank.

Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This high-performance systemoperates differently than a standard engine lubricationsystem and requires a special procedure when checkingthe engine oil level. Follow this procedure closelywhen checking the engine oil level.

The engine oil level must be checked when the engineis warm. Cold oil level in the dry sump tank may notindicate the actual amount of oil in the system. With thissystem, engine oil is contained in an external tank,separate from the engine. Under normal operatingconditions, the oil pan under the engine does not storeany oil. If the vehicle has been parked for an extendedperiod without the engine being started, some oilwill seep back into the oil pan, reducing the amount ofoil held in the dry sump tank and there could be noengine oil at all showing on the dipstick. This is normalsince the dipstick is designed to read engine oil levelonly after the engine has run long enough to reachnormal operating temperature. Do not add engine oilbased on cold engine dipstick readings. The engine oillevel on the dipstick will also be inaccurate if checkedwhile the engine is running.

1. To obtain an accurate engine oil level reading,warm up the engine to at least 175°F (80°C).Cold oil will not give a correct oil level reading.

2. Once the engine is warm, turn off the engine.Checking the oil while the engine is runningwill result in an incorrect oil level reading.

5-19

3. Wait at least five minutes (but not more than20 minutes) to allow oil to drain and settle inthe engine.

4. Remove the dipstick from the external engine oiltank and clean it with a lint-free paper towel or acloth. Re-insert the dipstick into the external oil tank,pushing it all the way in until it stops.

5. Remove the dipstick from the oil tank and read thelevel on the cross-hatched area. Oil levels that fallin the cross-hatched area are normal.

When to Add Engine Oil (Z06 Only)

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip ofthe dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil through the oil fill cap opening in theoil tank. This section explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-103.

See Racing or Other Competitive Driving on page 4-15for additional information on engine oil.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of theexternal engine oil tankand fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back into the oil tank when you are through.

5-20

Changing Engine Oil and Filter(Z06 Only)Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This high-performance systemoperates differently than a standard engine lubricationsystem and requires a special procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. Follow this procedure closelywhen changing the engine oil and filter.

A. Engine Oil Drain PlugsB. Seals

1. Remove the two engine oil drain plugs from thebottom of the engine oil pan. One drain plugdrains the external oil tank via the oil transfer supplyline. The other drain plug drains residual oil fromthe crankcase sump. Allow the oil to drain.

2. Once the oil has been drained from the engine,remove the engine oil filter and allow the oil todrain.

3. Re-install both drain plugs and tighten them to18 lb ft (25 Y).

4. Replace the oil filter and tighten it to 18 lb ft(25 Y). See Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-13 for the correct filter.

5. Oil is filled through the opening in the top of theexternal engine oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.

6. Add eight quarts (7.6 L) of oil to the oil tank. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 5-103.

7. Install the oil fill cap and insert the dipstick, ifremoved.

8. Start the engine and let it run at idle for at least15 seconds. This will circulate the fresh engineoil through the lubrication system.

9. Shut off the engine and check the oil level asdescribed under “Checking Engine Oil (Z06 Only).”

5-21

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meetingGM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic. However,not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.Look for and use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil hasbeen certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this on the oil container, and use only thoseoils that are identified as meeting GM StandardGM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front ofthe oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements foryour vehicle.

5-22

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718Mmay not be available. You can add substitute oildesignated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbolat all temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GMStandard GM4718M should not be used for anoil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM4718M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer that lets you know when tochange the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change will be indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life system to work properly,you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This high-performance systemoperates differently than a standard engine lubricationsystem and requires a special procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-17.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will comeon. Change the oil as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmight not indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, the engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who will perform this work usinggenuine parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your lastoil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-23

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change the oil priorto a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,reset the system.

To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message after anoil change:

1. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentageis displayed.

2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFEREMAINING 100% will appear.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

5-24

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forthe location of the engine air cleaner/filters.

Notice: If you spray water into the engine aircleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine aircleaner/filter housing, you could damage yourvehicle’s engine. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not spray water into theengine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing.

If you are cleaning your vehicle with the hood open,take care not to spray water directly near the filteropening of the air cleaner, as shown in the illustration,as this could damage your vehicle’s engine.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FiltersInspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace them at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information. Ifyou are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect thefilters at each engine oil change.

5-25

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FiltersTo inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filters to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt,new filters are required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filters, dothe following:

1. Remove the screws holding the filter element inplace.

2. Pull on latches found on either side of the filter.

3. Inspect or replace the filter. See MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 6-13.

4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to replace the aircleaner/filter cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps tostop flames if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

5-26

Automatic Transmission Fluid

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer service department and have it repairedas soon as possible.

There is a special procedure for checking and changingthe transmission fluid. Because this procedure isdifficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailerservice department. Contact your dealer/retailer foradditional information or the procedure can be found inthe service manual. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-16.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage your vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sureto use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the manual transmissionfluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer service department and have it repairedas soon as possible. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11 for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in the system. Addingfluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

5-27

When to Check and What to Use

The hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has thissymbol on it. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-14 for reservoirlocation.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften you should check the fluid level in your clutchmaster cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid to use.See Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 andRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

How to Check and Add FluidMake sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum) lineon the side of the reservoir. If it is not, remove thecap and add the proper fluid until the level reaches theMIN line.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add onlyDEX-COOL® extended life coolant.The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-31.A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® maycause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-28

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you donot need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core, andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additivesin your vehicle’s cooling system, you coulddamage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixtureof the engine coolant listed in this manual forthe cooling system. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

5-29

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surgetank is located toward therear of the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14for more informationon location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on the frontof the coolant surge tank. Do not overfill the surge tank.Too much coolant can result in an overflow when thefluid is hot.

5-30

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-14 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gage on theinstrument panel cluster and a COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 3-42 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-55 for more information.

5-31

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Turn it off and get everyoneaway from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehicles engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 5-33 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-33 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

5-32

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and you are not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later inthis section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and themessages COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE andREDUCED ENGINE POWER are displayed, along withthe Check Engine light, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this mode, you will notice a lossin power and engine performance. This operating modeallows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-17.

5-33

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark onthe front of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, youmay have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

5-34

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. Ifthe engine is overheating, the fan should be running. Ifit is not, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-33 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® maycause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

5-35

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD markon the front of the coolant surge tank, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 5-28 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the coolantsurge tank pressure cap — even a little — they



can come out at high speed. Never turn thecap when the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor the cooling system and coolant surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid such as alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’scoolant warning system is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

5-36

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one-quarter turn andthen stop.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

5-37

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixtureuntil the level inside stabilizes at the FULL COLDmark on the front of the surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD markon the coolant surge tank.

5-38

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.Check the level in the surge tank when the systemhas cooled down. If the coolant is not at theproper level, repeat Steps 1 through 4, then reinstallthe pressure cap. If the coolant is not at theproper level when the system cools down again,see your dealer/retailer.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick. There are markings on both sides ofthe dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.

5-39

When the enginecompartment is hot, thelevel should be at the HOTmark. When the enginecompartment is cool,the level should be at theFULL COLD mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage yourvehicle and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-40

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-14 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-41

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. Ifit is, you should have the brake hydraulic systemfixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakeswill not work well.

It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Addingbrake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added whenthe linings are worn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings are installed. Add or removebrake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

5-42

Checking Brake FluidThe brake fluid can be checked without taking off thecap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid levelshould be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it isnot, have the brake hydraulic system checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, makesure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This helps keepdirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakehydraulic system, the brakes might not workwell. This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in the brake hydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts so badly that theywill have to be replaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-89.

5-43

Brake WearYour vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are worn and new padsare needed. The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when you arepushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. That couldlead to an accident. When you hear the brakewear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withthe brakes.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentAs you make brake stops, the disc brakes automaticallyadjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When you replace parts of the braking system — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and youneed new ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might notwork properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance you have come toexpect can change in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

5-44

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer forone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label.

For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or theservice manual. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-46 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.This will help keep the battery from running down.

See “Power Window Initialization” in Power Windows onpage 2-17.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of yourvehicle, remove the black, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery trickle charger. This willhelp maintain the charge of the battery over an extendedperiod of time.

5-45

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushingor pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do notpush or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, usethe jump starting procedure in this manual to startyour vehicle when the battery has run down.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brakes.

5-46

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.

Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal (A)and a remote negative (−) terminal (B), as shownin the illustration, which should be used to jump startyour vehicle.The remote positive (+) terminal (A) can beaccessed by opening the cover of the enginecompartment fuse block.The remote negative (−) terminal (B) is locatedunderneath the engine cover, below the engine oilfill cap.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14for the location of the engine compartment fuseblock and engine oil fill cap.

5-47

You will not need to access the battery for jumpstarting. The remote terminals are for that purpose.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5-48

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminalfor this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-49

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the engine fuse block cover to its originalposition.

6. You may also need to initialize the power windows.See “Power Window Initialize” under PowerWindows on page 2-17 for more information.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-50

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you will need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

What to UseTo add lubricant when the level is low, useSAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115. To completely refill afterdraining, add Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada 992694). SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole withthe Synthetic Gear Lubricant.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it isrecommended that you take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

5-51

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-55.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity discharge lightingsystem operates at a very high voltage. If youtry to service any of the system components,you could be seriously injured. Have yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianservice them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’sHID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may noticethat the beam is a slightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

5-52

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps

A. High-beam HeadlampB. Low-beam HeadlampC. Front Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running

Lamp (DRL)

If the low-beam headlamp needs to be replaced, youwill need to see your dealer/retailer. See High IntensityDischarge (HID) Lighting on page 5-52 for moreinformation.

To replace a high-beam or front parking/turn signal/DRLbulb, do the following:

1. Turn the wheel to allow access to the wheel well.

2. Access the high-beam or front parking/turn signalbulbs by removing the access panel. To do this,remove the three outer fasteners and movethe cover back.

5-53

3. Remove the outer cover to expose the high-beamheadlamp bulb socket once the access cover hasbeen removed.

4. Remove the headlampbulb by releasing theouter tabs fromthe socket.

5. Remove the front parking/turn signal bulb by turningthe bulb socket counterclockwise.

6. Replace the high-beam headlamp bulb with a newbulb and reattach to the bulb socket.Replace the front parking/turn signal bulb by turningthe bulb socket clockwise.

7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplampsTo replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn signal bulb:

1. Remove the screw from the top of the lampassembly.

2. Tilt the lamp assembly toward you.

3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise and pull it out.

5-54

4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from thesocket.

5. Push the new bulb in the bulb socket until it snapsinto place.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by first lining up thetabs on the bottom of the lamp assembly with thetabs in the vehicle, then slide it in.

7. Replace the screw at the top of the lamp assembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberFront Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) 5702KAHeadlamp, High-Beam Lamp H9Sidemarker Lamp W3WStoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer/retailer.

Windshield ReplacementYour windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)system. If you ever have to get your windshieldreplaced, get one that is designed for HUD or your HUDimage may look out of focus.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearand cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For the proper type andlength, see Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-13.

It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper bladeassembly every six months.

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshieldwhen no wiper blade is installed could damage thewindshield. Any damage that occurs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch the windshield.

5-55

To remove the wiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshieldwipers.

2. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot lockingtab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) torelease it from the wiper arm hook (F).

4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A).The insert has two notches at one end that arelocked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.At the notch end, pull the insert from the bladeassembly.

5-56

To install the new wiper insert:

1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the endwith the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all theway through the blade claws at the oppositeend (B). Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as theinsert is fully installed.

2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottomclaws. Make sure that all other claws are properlylocked on both sides of the insert slots.

3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks inthe hook slot.

4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assemblyonto the windshield.

Installation guide:

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation

5-57

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warrantybooklet for details.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchflexing. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-24.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-66.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 5-67 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

5-58

Low-Profile Performance TireThe original equipment tires on your vehicle areclassified as low-profile performance tires.These tires are designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement. You mayalso notice more road noise with low-profile tiresand that they tend to wear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Yourvehicle warranty does not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to the correct inflationpressure and, when possible avoid contactwith curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roadsoften, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.All season tires provide good overall performance onmost surfaces but they may not offer the tractionyou would like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. With wintertires, there may be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shorter tread life. Afterswitching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, see BuyingNew Tires on page 5-73.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on allfour wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,and speed rating as the original equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as your originalequipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires witha lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximumspeed capability.

5-59

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 5-75.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-60

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letterP as the first character in the tire size meansa passenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

5-61

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may bemade from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-66.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-24.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-24.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-24.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

5-62

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-24.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-24.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

5-63

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-72.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-75.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-24.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-24.

Run-Flat TiresYour vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is nospare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no placeto store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires performso well without any air that a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire haslost pressure.

{CAUTION:

When the low tire warning light is displayed onthe instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’shandling capabilities will be reduced duringsevere maneuvers. If you drive too fast, youcould lose control of your vehicle. You orothers could be injured. Do not drive over55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warninglight is displayed. Drive cautiously and checkyour tire pressures as soon as you can.

If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the sideof the road to change the tire. You can just keep ondriving. The shorter the distance you drive and theslower the speed, the greater the chance that the tirewill not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated

5-64

run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance thatthe tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectivelywith no air pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) atspeeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would thenhave to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, itprovides a cushion between the road and the wheel.Because you will not have this cushion when driving ona deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damageyour wheel and require replacement of it.

Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.This damage could occur even before you havedriven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tirehas been damaged, or if you have driven any distanceon a run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flattire service center to determine whether the tire can berepaired or should be replaced. To maintain yourvehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires must beself-supporting tires. As soon as possible, contactthe nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facilityfor inspection and repair or replacement. To locatethe nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, callRoadside Assistance. For phone numbers and RoadsideService details see Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-8.

{CAUTION:

Run-flat tires are constructed differently thanother tires and could explode during improperservice. You or others could be injured orkilled if you attempt to repair, replace,dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only anauthorized run-flat service center repair,replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.

The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors thatare part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-68. Thesesensors contain batteries which are designed to lastfor 10 years under normal driving conditions. See yourdealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheelreplaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.

5-65

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-24. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

5-66

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) orhigher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can cause sudden



tire failure. You could have a crash and you orothers could be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure the tires arerated for high speed operation, in excellentcondition, and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for the vehicle load.

If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of 175 mph(282 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the coldinflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressureshown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whicheveris lower. See the example following. When you end thishigh-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflationpressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-24.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflation pressuremolded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, nearthe rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximumload 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

5-67

For this example, you would set the inflation pressurefor high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).Racing or other competitive driving may affect thewarranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warrantybooklet for more information.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flashfor approximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-69,for additional information.

5-68

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry and Science Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:




Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designedto warn the driver when a low tire pressure conditionexists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tireand wheel assembly on your vehicle. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tiresand transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warninglight, located in theinstrument panel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in aspecific tire appears on the Driver Information Center(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message appear at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can

5-69

be viewed by the driver. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displays seeDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-55.

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. This could be an earlyindicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to yourvehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-24, for an example of the Tireand Loading Information label and its location onyour vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-66 for additional information.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tirepressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-71, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-72,and Tires on page 5-58.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tire sealant is notcovered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

TPMS Malfunction Light and MessageThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more of theTPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage is also displayed. The low tire warning lightand DIC warning message come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected. Some of theconditions that can cause the malfunction light and DICmessage to come on are:

• The TPMS sensor matching process was not doneor not completed successfully. The DIC messageshould go off after successfully completing thesensor matching process.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. Under these conditions the TPMSmalfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,and at the same time the DIC message isdisplayed. The DIC message and TPMS malfunctionlight should go off once the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensor matching process isperformed successfully.

5-70

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.Tires and wheels other than those recommendedfor your vehicle could prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See Buying New Tires onpage 5-73.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signala low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensorsor rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codeswill need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.

The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions inthe following order: driver side front tire, passengerside front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damageAlso check for damaged wheels. See When It IsTime for New Tires on page 5-72 and WheelReplacement on page 5-76.

The tires on your vehicle are different sizes frontto rear. Due to this, the tires should not be rotated.Each tire and wheel should be used only in theposition it is in.

5-71

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,influence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsureabout the need to replace your tires as they get older,consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

5-72

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. The original equipment tires installed onyour vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meetGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed to give thesame performance and vehicle safety, during normaluse, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling, traction control, and tirepressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS formud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 5-60, for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This isbecause uniform tread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing most like it did when thetires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-71.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as your originalequipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Yand ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires witha lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximumspeed capability.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizes(other than those originally installed on yourvehicle), brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes (other than thoseoriginally installed on your vehicle), brands ortypes, may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the correct size, brand, andtype tires on all four wheels.

5-73

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those thatdo not have a TPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPCSpec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the proper warning level youwould get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-68.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-24, for more information aboutthe Tire and Loading Information label and its locationon your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this mayaffect the way your vehicle performs, including itsbraking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, andresistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehiclehas electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,traction control, and electronic stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehiclemay not provide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels are selected.You may increase the chance that you willcrash and suffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems developed foryour vehicle, and have them properly installedby a GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-73 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-74

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

5-75

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing willnot be necessary on a regular basis. However, ifyou notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling toone side or the other, the alignment might need tobe checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

5-76

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance tothe body and chassis.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheelnuts might come loose and the wheel couldfall off, causing a crash.

5-77

Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to becomeloose and even come off. This could lead to acrash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Ifyou have to replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

Tighten the wheel lug nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.

5-78

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it has beenused or how far it has been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combination androad conditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, and donot spin your wheels. If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install them on therear tires.

5-79

Lifting Your Vehicle

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manual transmissionto FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,you can put blocks in front of and behind thewheels.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle or thevehicle may fall and cause your or othersinjury.

If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow theinstructions that came with the jack, and be sure to usethe correct lifting points to avoid damaging yourvehicle.

5-80

Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. To lift your vehicleproperly, follow the advice in this part.

To help prevent vehicle damage:

• Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

• Make sure the jack you are using spans at leasttwo crossmember ribs.

• Lift only in the areas shown in the followingpictures.

For additional information, see your dealer/retailerand the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.

Lifting From the Front

The front lifting points can be accessed from either sideof your vehicle, behind the front tires.

5-81

1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to theillustration shown.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jackand the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jackspans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).

5-82

Lifting From the Rear

The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear ofthe vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.

1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to theillustration shown.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jackand the vehicle.

5-83

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jackspans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).

For more information, see Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4.

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changingequipment, and no place to store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If airgoes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak outslowly. See Tires on page 5-58 for additionalinformation.

Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type oftire can operate effectively with no air pressure, soyou will not need to stop on the side of the roadto change a flat tire. You can just keep on driving. Theshorter the distance you drive and the slower thespeed, the greater the chance that the run-flat tire willnot have to be replaced. Run-flat tires perform sowell without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.See Run-Flat Tires on page 5-64 and Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-68.

5-84

{CAUTION:

Special tools and procedures are required toservice a run-flat tire. If these special tools andprocedures are not used you or others couldbe injured and your vehicle could be damaged.Always be sure the proper tools andprocedures, as described in the servicemanual, are used.

Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tirevalves and tire pressure monitor sensors in yourvehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would notbe covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealantsin your vehicle’s run-flat tires.

To order a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-16.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particlesfrom your upholstery. It is important to keep yourupholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Yourvehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heatthat could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to your home furnishings may alsotransfer color to your vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

5-85

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on yourvehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’sinterior, maintain adequate ventilation by openingyour vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you canalso obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to removeodors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleanersor techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage toyour vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressivelywith a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage your interior and does not improve theeffectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.Using too much soap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result fromthe use of many organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may onlybe used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forsoils, always try to remove them first with plain water orclub soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as muchof the soil as possible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

5-86

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

Coated MoldingsThese moldings are around the hatch opening in therear area.

• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or softlint-free cloth dampened with water.

• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution canbe used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not useheat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Neveruse spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents to cleanyour vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

5-87

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of yourinterior and are not recommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on yourinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Cargo Cover and Convenience NetWash with warm water and mild detergent, rinsewith cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not usechlorine bleach.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-88

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on yourvehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it statesthat it should not be used on plastic parts, do notuse it on your vehicle or damage may occurand it would not be covered by the warranty.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents thatare petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic onyour vehicle. Approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer/retailer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 5-94. Follow allmanufacturers’ directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle care product.Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water to enter thevehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-89.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-94.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

5-89

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, you may use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and abuildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-90

Removable Roof PanelNotice: If you use a glass treatment and/orconditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethylsulfate on the roof panel, you could damagethe panel. The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Only use a GM-approved glass cleaneron the roof panel.

Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing,and/or storing the roof panel.

• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then drythe panel.

• Clean a transparent roof panel with GM GlassCleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel forone minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint-freecloth. Do not use glass cleaner on a painted roofpanel.

• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials on eithertype of panel.

If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roofpanel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When thepanel gets wet, dry it off.

Convertible TopThe vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.However, high pressure car washes may cause waterto enter your vehicle.

When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, anda brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do notuse detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleachingagents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoidspots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric fora few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mildfoam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entirevehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top iscompletely dry before you lower it.

• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s paintedfinish; it could leave streaks.

• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,ask the manager if the equipment could damageyour top.

5-91

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim maybe damaged if you do not wash your vehicle afterdriving on roads that have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,

cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

5-92

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this for you.

Fiberglass Springs (CompositeSprings)Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaningproducts, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaningagents on fiberglass springs, you may damagethe springs. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Use only approved cleanerswhen cleaning your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-93

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.Convertible Top Cleaner Cleans convertible tops.Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

5-94

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side. You can see it if you look throughthe windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-103 for your vehicle’sengine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box. It isvery helpful if you ever need to order parts. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage would not be covered byyour warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, evenif your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-57.

5-95

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuseblock. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turnoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiringchecked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Ifthe overload is caused by some electrical problem, haveit fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power seats, powerwindows, and other power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do not havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without – like the radio orcigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger side of the vehicle, under the instrumentpanel and under the toe-board.

Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to accessthe fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of thepanel. Open the fuse block cover to access the fuses.

5-96

You can remove fuses using the fuse puller.

Fuses Usage

SPARE Spare Fuse

SPARE Spare Fuse

SPARE Spare Fuse

Fuses Usage

SPARE Spare Fuse

TPA Tonneau Pulldown Actuator

ONSTAR OnStar®

5-97

Fuses Usage

DRIV DRSWITCH Driver Door Switch

TELESWTCH/MSM

Telescope Switch, Memory SeatModule

IGN SWTCH/INTR SNSR Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor

BCK/UP LAMP Reverse Lamps

REVERSELAMPS Reverse Lamps

Blank Not Used

STOP LAMP Stop Lamp

BTSI SOL/STRWHL LCK

Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,Steering Wheel Column Lock

BLANK Not Used

RDO/S-BAND/VICS Radio, S-Band, VICS

REAR FOG/ALDL/TOPSWTCH

Rear Fog Lamp, Assembly LineDiagnostic Link Connector,Convertible Top Switch

GM LANRUN/CRNK GM LAN Devices

Fuses Usage

ISRVM/ HVAC Electric Inside Rearview Mirror,Heating Ventilation, Air Conditioning

CRUISESWTCH Cruise Control Switch

TONNEAURELSE Tonneau Release

RUN CRNK Run/Crank Relay

HTD SEAT/WPR RLY Heated Seat, Wiper Relays

ECM Engine Control Module

SDM/AOSSWTCHAIRBAG

Sensing and Diagnostic Module,Automatic Occupant SensingModule, Airbag

CLSTR/HUD Cluster, Heads-Up Display

HVAC/PWR SND

Heating, Ventilation/Air Conditioning,Power Sounder

EXH MDL Exhaust Module (Z06); Spare(Coupe and Convertible)

DR LCK Door Locks

CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp

SWC DM Steering Wheel Dimming

5-98

Fuses UsageTONNEAURELSE Tonneau Release

TRUNK RELSE Trunk ReleaseREAR/FOG Rear Fog LampsFUEL DRRELSE Fuel Door Release

BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not Used

Fuses UsageLTR Cigarette LighterDRVR HTDSEAT Driver Heated Seat

WPR DWELL Wiper DwellBLANK Not UsedAUX PWR Auxiliary PowerPASS HTDSEAT Passenger Heated Seat

Fuses UsageBLANK Not UsedPWR/ WNDWS/TRUNK/FUELRELSE

Power Windows, Trunk, Fuel DoorRelease

TRUNK RELSE Trunk ReleaseBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedPWR SEATSMSM Power Seats, Memory Seat Module

BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedWPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/WasherBLANK Not Used

5-99

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThere is one fuse block in the engine compartment located on the passenger side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.

5-100

Fuse Usage

1 Transmission Control Module/Transmission

2 Horn, Alternator Sense3 Antilock Brakes/Real Time Damping4 Wiper5 Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps6 02 Sensor7 Battery Main 58 Park Lamps

9 Powertrain Relay Input/ElectronicThrottle Control

10 Manual Transmission Solenoids

11 Engine Control Module/TransmissionControl Module/Easy Key Module

12 Odd Numbered Fuel Injectors

13 Electronic Suspension Control(Option)

14 Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass AirFlow Sensor

15 Air Conditioner Compressor16 Even Numbered Fuel Injectors17 Windshield Washer18 Headlamp Washer

19 Passenger Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

Fuse Usage20 Fuel Pump21 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp22 Front Fog Lamp

23 Passenger Side High-BeamHeadlamp

24 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp

J-Style Fuses Usage25 Cooling Fan26 Battery Main 327 Antilock Brake System

28 Heating/Ventilation/Air ConditioningBlower

29 Battery Main 230 Starter31 Audio Amplifier32 Blank33 Battery Main 1

Micro-Relays Usage34 Horn35 Air Conditioning Compressor36 Windshield Washer37 Park, Position Lamps

5-101

Micro-Relays Usage38 Front Fog Lamp39 High-Beam Headlamp46 Headlamp Washer55 Fuel Pump

Mini-Relays Usage40 Rear Defog41 Windshield Wiper High/Low42 Windshield Wiper Run/Accessory43 Crank44 Powertrain Ignition 145 Windshield Wiper On/Off47 Low-Beam Headlamp

Spare Fuses Usage48 Spare49 Spare50 Spare51 Spare52 Spare53 Spare54 Fuse Puller

Diodes Usage

§ Diode 1

§ Wiper

§ Diode 2

5-102

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System

6.2L V8 Engine 12.5 qt 11.85 L7.0L V8 Engine 11.9 qt 11.25 L

Engine Oil with Filter6.2 LV8 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L6.2 LV8 Engine with extended oil cooler 6.0 qt 5.7 L7.0 L V8 Engine 8.0 qt 7.6 L

Fuel Tank 18.0 gal 68.0 LTransmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and FilterReplacement) 6.5 qt 6.2 L

Manual Transmission – Base 3.6 qt 3.5 L

5-103

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricManual Transmission – Z51 4.2 qt 4.0 LManual Transmission – Z06 4.5 qt 4.3 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order

6.2L V8 (LS3) W AutomaticManual

0.040 inch(1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

7.0L V8 (LS7) E Manual 0.040 inch(1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

Engine DataEngine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio

6.2L V8 430 @ 5900 rpm 424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1

6.2L V8 withoption NPP 436 @ 5900 rpm 428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1

7.0L V8 505 @ 6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.0:1

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or yourdealer/retailer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help you keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you willdrive it. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-24.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job.



If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailerto have a qualified technician do the work. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for your serviceneeds, you will know that trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the work using genuine parts.

If you want to purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it, and what you caneasily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-23 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the messagecomes on within 10 months since the vehicle waspurchased or Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-17. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-23. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-25. See footnote (k). •

Check tire inflation pressures and tire wear. See Tires on page 5-58. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-25. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (l).

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Ifyou have the Z06 or Z51 performance package,lubricate the outer ends of both rear toe-links.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine partsas needed. To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling system and pressure capand cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at least once ayear.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-55 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-90 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checkingthe Restraint Systems on page 1-59.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and body doorhinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including thosefor the hood, rear compartment, console door, andany folding seat hardware. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as high performance operation.

6-7

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability, and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by your warranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-17.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-28.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

6-8

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation -Tire Pressure on page 5-66.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-34.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The vehicle should start onlyin PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehiclestarts in any other position, contact yourdealer/retailer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift leverin NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,and try to start the engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedal is pushed down allthe way to the floor. If the vehicle starts whenthe clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

6-9

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-34.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off and without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-10

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certifiedfor Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. However, not all syntheticAPI oils with the starburst symbolwill meet this GM standard. Look forand use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM4718M. For the properviscosity, see Engine Oil onpage 5-17.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-28.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

HydraulicClutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GMPart No. U.S. 88958860, in Canada88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021184, in Canada89021186).

ChassisLubrication

(Rear Toe-LinkOuter Ends with

ZO6 or Z51Option)

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 88861800, inCanada 88861801).

6-11

Usage Fluid/LubricantAutomatic

TransmissionDEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (GM Part No. U.S.89021677, in Canada 89021678)meeting GM Specification 9986115.With a complete drain and refill, add4.7 ounces (140 ml), or 6.8 ounces(200 ml) for ZO6 Models, ofLimited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, inCanada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 5-51.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GMPart No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada992723) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GMPart No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-12

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number AC Delco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter6.2L V8 and 7.0L V8 Engines 15776148 A3077C

Engine Oil Filter6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF487.0L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15848592 —Spark Plug

6.2L V8 Engine 12571164 41-9857.0L V8 Engine 12571165 41-104

Windshield Wiper Blade 20.7 inches (52.5 cm)Driver’s Side 12335960 —Passenger’s Side 12335961 —

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.2L and 7.0L Engines

6-14

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16




6-17




6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-5Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-6Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-8Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10Courtesy Transportation .................................7-11Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ....................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................7-16Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors .........................................7-16Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-18Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18OnStar® ......................................................7-19Navigation System ........................................7-20Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ...................................7-20

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service, or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership or thegeneral manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, in theU.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contactGeneral Motors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

7-2

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motorsand your dealer are committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with your new vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in this program.

7-3

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event thatyou do not feel your concerns have been addressedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to beaware of its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The program provides for the review ofthe facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictions because itis informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), calltoll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may callthe General Motors Customer Communication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),or you may write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by your VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

7-4

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected section ofgmcanada.com where you can save information onGM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each of yourpreferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe toE-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gmcanada.com.

7-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. cancommunicate with Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customer wishesto write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should beaddressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-6

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

7-7

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a persondriving this vehicle without the consent of the owneris not eligible for coverage.

Services ProvidedThe following services are provided in the U.S. andCanada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, upto a maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, serviceto provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuels will notbe provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be coveredat no charge if you are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. A remote unlock may be available ifyou have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensuresecurity, the driver must present personalidentification before lock-out service is provided. InCanada, the vehicle registration is also required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warrantyservice or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle ismired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in goodcondition, when equipped and properly inflated, iscovered at no charge. The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if not coveredby a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at nocharge if the vehicle does not start.

7-8

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or the mostscenic route to your destination, anywhere inNorth America, along with helpful travel informationpertaining to your trip.Please allow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warranty relatedvehicle disablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from the original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some ofthe unplanned expense you may incur while waitingfor your vehicle to be repaired.

Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and acopy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, your advisor willhelp you make any necessary arrangements andexplain how to claim for trip interruption expenseassistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may betimes, when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and you will bereimbursed up to $100 upon submission of theoriginal receipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warrantyrepairs are the responsibility of the driver.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursement toan owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or type ofoccurrence.

7-9

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehicles operatedon a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impoundtowing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains, or other tractiondevices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to make any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program at any time withoutnotification.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.

7-10

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extended powertrain warrantyin both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you withshuttle service to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable time anddistance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, andpublic transportation is used instead of the dealer’sshuttle service, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can only be up to the maximumamount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supported byoriginal receipts. See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement offuel or other transportation costs.

7-11

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnightwarranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by original receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every dealer. Please contact your dealerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by a qualified technician usingthe proper equipment and quality replacement parts.Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made withthe same materials and construction methods asthe parts with which your vehicle was originally built.Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choiceto assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are from undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safety performance, however,the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are notcovered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany related failures are not covered by that warranty.

7-12

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts arenot covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to such partsare not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in the quality of coverageafforded by various insurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reduced protection to yourGM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairsby using aftermarket collision parts.

Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarketcollision parts. When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Readyour lease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure you areall right. If you are uninjured, make sure that noone else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger or youare instructed to move it by a police officer.

7-13

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-8 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or write down the driver’sname, the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance companyand policy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need. If they ask fora police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and you canget a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or aprivate collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

7-14

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by yourGM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

7-15

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins’ give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle.

7-16

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example,your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deployment and deployairbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.These modules may store data to help yourdealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Somemodules may also store data about how you operate thevehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may also retain the owner’spersonal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash ornear crash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data relatedto vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR inthis vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safetybelts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

7-18

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment isrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required bylaw. Data that GM collects or receives may also be usedfor GM research needs or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where a need is shownand the data is not tied to a specific vehicle orvehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to theOnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®

Terms and Conditions for information on data collectionand use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-45 inthis manual for more information.

7-19

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-20

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Active Handling System ..................................... 4-7Active Handling System Light ........................... 3-41Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-58Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-95Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-25Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-25Air Dam, Front ............................................... 2-22Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-36Readiness Light .......................................... 3-35

Airbag System ................................................ 1-44What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-51When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-49Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-47

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ................................................... 1-58How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-50Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-52Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-57What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-50

Antenna, Diversity Antenna System .................. 3-103Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ..................................................... 3-103

Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-40Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-88Cargo Cover and Convenience Net ................ 5-88Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-93Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-89Coated Moldings ......................................... 5-87Convertible Top ........................................... 5-91Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-86Fiberglass Springs ....................................... 5-93Finish Care ................................................. 5-89Finish Damage ............................................ 5-93Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-88Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-85Leather ...................................................... 5-87Removable Roof Panel ................................. 5-91Tires .......................................................... 5-92Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-94Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90

Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10Ashtray ......................................................... 3-25

1

Audio System ................................................. 3-81Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-101Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-103Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ................................................. 3-101Radio Reception ........................................ 3-102Setting the Time .......................................... 3-82Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-101XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-103

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-82Automatic Door Lock ....................................... 2-13Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-27Operation ................................................... 2-26

BBattery .......................................................... 5-45

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-19Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20

BrakeEmergencies ................................................ 4-6

Brakes .......................................................... 5-42System Warning Light .................................. 3-39

Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21

Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-51Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-53High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-55Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-54

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-73

CCalibration ............................................. 2-39, 2-41California Fuel .................................................. 5-6California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-14, 2-37, 4-19, 4-29Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-57CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-96Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-55Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-79Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-43Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12

2

Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-33Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-29Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .......................................... 1-35, 1-39Older Children ............................................. 1-25Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-40Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-25Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Cargo Cover and Convenience Net ................ 5-88Coated Moldings ......................................... 5-87Convertible Top ........................................... 5-91Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-89Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-86Fiberglass Springs ....................................... 5-93Finish Care ................................................. 5-89Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-88Interior ....................................................... 5-85Leather ...................................................... 5-87Removable Roof Panel ................................. 5-91Tires .......................................................... 5-92Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-31Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-25Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30

Clock ............................................................ 3-82Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-27Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12Compass ............................................... 2-39, 2-41Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ................. 4-15Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3Convenience Net ............................................ 2-57Convertible Top ...................................... 2-63, 2-70Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-42Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-25Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-31

Cooling System .............................................. 5-34Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-19Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-55Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-11Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7

3

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................... 7-16Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-16Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-15Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-8Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-96Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-103Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-13Locks ........................................................ 2-10Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-12Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-13

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-50DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-72DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-55Other Messages .......................................... 3-71

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-16Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-18Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-18Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-18In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-24Winter ........................................................ 4-19

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-25

EEDR ............................................................. 7-18Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-95Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-96Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-96Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-96Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-96

4

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-25Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-43Coolant ...................................................... 5-28Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-42Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-14Exhaust ..................................................... 2-37Oil ............................................................. 5-17Oil Life System ........................................... 5-23Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-46Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-33Overheating ................................................ 5-31Running While Parked .................................. 2-38Starting ...................................................... 2-23

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-19Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-25Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-19

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-25Finish Damage ............................................... 5-93Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-84Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-55Fluid ............................................................. 5-27

Power Steering ........................................... 5-39Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-41

Fog LampFog ........................................................... 3-17

Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-47Front Air Dam ................................................ 2-22Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-48Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6

5

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-96Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-96

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-42Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-46Fuel .......................................................... 3-48Speedometer .............................................. 3-34Tachometer ................................................. 3-34Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-38

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-48Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-6

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-55GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7

HHatch/Trunk ................................................... 2-14Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6

HeadlampAiming ....................................................... 5-51

Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-96Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-53High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9On Reminder .............................................. 3-16Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-16

Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-20Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ........................................................... 3-25Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-47High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-67Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-18Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-18Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12Release ..................................................... 5-13

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-27

6

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-22Immobilizer .................................................... 2-20Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-20Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-66Installing the Roof Panel .................................. 2-62Instrument Panel

Overview ..................................................... 3-4Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness .................................................. 3-19Cluster ....................................................... 3-33

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-46

KKeyless Access System ..................................... 2-4Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-5Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-60Lamps

Courtesy .................................................... 3-19Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-19Reading ..................................................... 3-19Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-22LATCH System

Child Restraints ................................... 1-35, 1-39Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ................................. 5-80Light

Active Handling System ................................ 3-41Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-35Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-40Brake System Warning ................................. 3-39Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-47Highbeam On ............................................. 3-47Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-47Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-43One-to-Four Shift ......................................... 3-38Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-36Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-34Security ..................................................... 3-47TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-40Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-42Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-40

7

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................... 3-19

LightsExterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9On Reminder .............................................. 3-16

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-9Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-24Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13Locks

Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-13Door .......................................................... 2-10Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13Power Door ................................................ 2-12Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-13

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13Lumbar

Power and Side Bolsters ................................ 1-3

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-43Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Manual Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-27Operation ................................................... 2-31

Manual, Using .................................................... iiiMemory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls .... 1-4Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-55Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass .... 2-41Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®

and Compass .......................................... 2-39Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-44Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-44Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-43

MP3 ............................................................. 3-96MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5

8

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-20Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 3-101New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-34Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-17Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-46

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-23Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-25One-to-Four Shift Light .................................... 3-38Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-45Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-48Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-24

OutsideAutomatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-44Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-44Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-43

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode .......................................... 5-33

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-93Park Brake .................................................... 2-34Park (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-35Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-36

ParkingOver Things That Burn ................................. 2-37

Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-37Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-36Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-31Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-52Passing ......................................................... 4-13Perchlorate Materials Requirements,

California ..................................................... 5-4

9

PowerDoor Locks ................................................. 2-12Electrical System ......................................... 5-96Lumbar and Side Bolsters .............................. 1-3Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-23Seat ............................................................ 1-3Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-39Windows .................................................... 2-17

Privacy .......................................................... 7-18Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-18Navigation System ....................................... 7-20OnStar ....................................................... 7-19Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-20

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-13

RRacing or Other Competitive Driving .................. 4-15Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-20Radios .......................................................... 3-81Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-82Radios

Navigation/Radio System, see NavigationManual ................................................. 3-101

Reception ................................................. 3-102Setting the Time .......................................... 3-82Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-101

Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-19Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-51

Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-9Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-56Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass .................................................... 2-41Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-39Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-29Remote, Keyless Access System ........................ 2-4Removing the Roof Panel ................................ 2-59Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-55Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-55Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-16General Motors ........................................... 7-16United States Government ............................ 7-15

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-59Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-60Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-23Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-8Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-24

10

Roof Panel .................................................... 2-58Installing the Roof Panel ............................... 2-62Removing the Roof Panel ............................. 2-59Storing the Roof Panel ................................. 2-61

Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 5-64Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-38

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-34Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-88How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-25Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8Seats

Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 1-4Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters .................... 1-3Power Seats ................................................. 1-3

Seats (cont.)Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8

Securing a Child RestraintRight Front Seat Position .............................. 1-40

Security Light ................................................. 3-47Selective Ride Control ..................................... 4-10Service ........................................................... 5-3

Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5California Pershlorate Materials

Requirements ............................................ 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-43Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16

Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-57Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-35Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-36Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-103Speedometer .................................................. 3-34Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-23Steering ........................................................ 4-11Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-101Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ....................... 1-4Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7

11

Storage AreasCenter Console Storage Area ........................ 2-55Convenience Net ......................................... 2-57Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-55Glove Box .................................................. 2-55Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-56

Storing the Roof Panel .................................... 2-61Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-23Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18

TTachometer .................................................... 3-34Taillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-54TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-40Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-101Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-18Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18

Immobilizer ................................................. 2-20Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-20

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7Time, Setting .................................................. 3-82Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42

Tires ............................................................. 5-58Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ................................................. 5-92Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-73Chains ....................................................... 5-79Cleaning .................................................... 5-92Different Size .............................................. 5-74High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-67If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-84Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-66Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-71Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-80Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-69Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-68Run-Flat ..................................................... 5-64Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-60Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-62Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-75Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-76Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-76When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-72Winter Tires ................................................ 5-59

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-29Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-29Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-29

12

TractionActive Handling System ................................. 4-7Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-40Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-9Selective Ride Control .................................. 4-10

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-27Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-27One-to-Four Shift Light ................................. 3-38

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-31Trunk/Hatch ................................................... 2-14Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-18

UUniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-75Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-48

Operation ................................................... 2-48Using this Manual ............................................... iii

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-24Parking Your ............................................... 2-37Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-18Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-95Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-95

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-72

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30Visors ........................................................... 2-18Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-38

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-32Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-55Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

13

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-76Different Size .............................................. 5-74Replacement ............................................... 5-76

Windows ....................................................... 2-16Power ........................................................ 2-17

WindshieldReplacement ............................................... 5-55Washer ...................................................... 3-10Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-41Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-55Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-90Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-96Wipers ......................................................... 3-9

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-19Winter Tires ................................................... 5-59Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-16

XXM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-100XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-103

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

corvetteactioncenter.com...Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats...

Documents

Transcript of corvetteactioncenter.com...Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats...